UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C.  20549
 
 
FORM 10-K
 
 
( Mark One)
  ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
 
For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2014
 
Commission File Number: 001-31588
 
 
COMMUNICATIONS   SYSTEMS, INC.
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)
 
  Minnesota   41-0957999  
  (State or  other jurisdiction    (Federal Employer  
  of incorporation or organization)    Identification No.)  
 
10900 Red Circle Drive, Minnetonka, MN 55343
( Address of principal executive offices and zip code)

Registrant’s telephone number, including area code: (952) 996-1674

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:
 
  Title of each class   Name of each exchange on which registered  
  Common Stock, $.05 par value   NASDAQ  
  Preferred Stock Purchase Rights      
 
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None
 
 
Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. YES ☐  NO ☒
 
Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Act.  YES ☐  NO ☒

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.  YES ☒  NO ☐

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).  YES ☒  NO ☐

Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K. ☒

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer or a smaller reporting company.
See definition of “accelerated filer,” “large accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Act.
Large Accelerated Filer  ☐ Accelerated Filer  ☒ Non-Accelerated Filer ☐ Smaller Reporting Company ☐

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Act).  YES ☐  NO ☒

The aggregate market value of the voting and non-voting common equity held by non-affiliates of the Registrant was approximately $84,159,000   based upon the closing sale price of the Company’s common stock on the NASDAQ on June 30, 2014.

As of March 1, 2015 there were outstanding 8,658,784 shares of the Registrant’s common stock.
 
Documents Incorporated by Reference: Portions of the Company’s Proxy Statement for its Annual Meeting of Shareholders to be held on May 21, 2015 are incorporated by reference into Part III of this Form 10-K.
 


 
 

 

 

PART I
 
ITEM 1. BUSINESS
 
(a) GENERAL DEVELOPMENT OF BUSINESS

Communications Systems, Inc. (herein collectively referred to as “CSI,” “our,” “we” or the “Company”) is a Minnesota corporation organized in 1969 that operates directly and through its subsidiaries located in the United States (U.S.), Costa Rica, and the United Kingdom (U.K.). CSI is principally engaged through its Suttle, Inc. subsidiary and business unit in the manufacture and sale of modular connecting and wiring devices for voice and data communications, digital subscriber line filters, and structured wiring systems and through its Transition Networks, Inc. subsidiary and business unit in the manufacture and sale of core media conversion products for telecommunications networks. Through its JDL Technologies, Inc. subsidiary and business unit, CSI provides IT solutions including network design, computer infrastructure installations, IT service management, change management, network security, and network operation services.

The Company maintains a website at www.commsystems.com. Our annual reports on Form 10-K, our quarterly reports on Form 10-Q and our periodic reports on Form 8-K (and any amendments to these reports) are available free of charge by linking from our website to the Securities and Exchange Commission website.

( b) FINANCIAL INFORMATION ABOUT INDUSTRY SEGMENTS

The Company classifies its businesses into three segments: Suttle , which manufactures U.S. standard modular connecting and wiring devices for voice and data communications; Transition Networks, which designs and markets media conversion products, Ethernet switches, and other connectivity and data transmission products; and JDL Technologies, (JDL ), which provides IT solutions. Effective January 1, 2014, the Company realigned the financial reporting for its business units.  As a result of this realignment, all corporate general and administrative expenses that were previously categorized as “Other” are now included within the three business units as fully allocated costs. There are no material intersegment revenues.  Further information regarding these segments, including customer and industry concentration, is set forth in Item 7, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and in Note 11 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements under Item 8.

(c) NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION OF BUSINESS

(1)   Information Regarding Business Segments

(i)   Suttle, Inc.

Suttle manufactures and markets a variety of telecommunication products for outside plant, connectivity and premise distribution under the Suttle brand name in the United States and internationally. Suttle’s new FutureLink TM brand includes solutions for higher speeds, tool-less connectivity and lower cost of ownership, such as copper and fiber connectivity systems, enclosure systems, network interface devices (NIDs), splitters, and active technologies for voice, data and video communications. The new plastic MediaMAX TM brand is optimized for wired and wireless gigabit connectivity to all areas of the home and small office and rounds out Suttle’s premise distribution portfolio, which also includes the traditional metal   SOHO  Access ™ , and passive lines, such as xDSL filters, under the SpeedStar TM brand. The Company manufactures 70% of its products at its plants in Hector, Minnesota (Suttle, Inc.) and San Jose, Costa Rica (Suttle Costa Rica, S.A.). The other 30% are purchased from offshore contract manufacturers. Segment sales were $67,330,000 (57% of consolidated revenues) in 2014 and $54,346,000 (41% of consolidated revenues) in 2013.

Products

Suttle offers a broad range of critical components for premise, connectivity and outside plant networking. The Company’s customer-oriented approach provides right-sized solutions that leverage existing infrastructure and protect investments as markets and technologies grow and change. With over 100 years of knowledge and experience, Suttle is a reliable partner, delivering innovative, flexible, easy-to-use solutions, lower cost of ownership, and solid customer support.
 
2

 

 

 
Outside Plant:

Suttle’s outside plant products (OSP) are designed to operate in challenging environments yet be easily accessible, extend the life of the existing network, enhance data speeds, and prevent loss.  
 
Suttle OSP systems are designed for flexibility and scalability in real world applications for both copper and fiber networks. Suttle's FutureLink TM OSP Fiber solutions offer a range of products including terminals, patch-and-splice and splitter enclosures. For copper networks, Suttle’s FutureLink TM OSP Copper solutions include building entrance terminals and enclosures.

Premise Distribution:

Suttle provides service distribution products for cost-effective solutions using existing wiring. These products reduce installation time and labor costs, and increase the provider’s return on investment. In addition to reducing a service provider’s up-front costs, Suttle’s high throughput solutions help eliminate potential bottlenecks to “future-proof” the installation, reducing future costs.

Suttle’s new MediaMAX TM brand for reliable brownfield and greenfield premise connectivity meets the increasing demand for wired and wireless high-speed connectivity throughout the home and small office. Designed to optimize installation cost and practices while maximizing coverage and bandwidth at the point of use for multiple deployment topologies, this brand includes a premise connectivity and distribution system, featuring plastic modular enclosures and tool-less, snap-in modules to minimize wireless interference.

Suttle’s fiber solutions help providers in the deployment of fiber to the premise (FTTP) service under the FutureLink™ brand. These products feature higher speed connections, tool-less connectivity and lower cost of ownership. Our popular SOHO Access™ enclosures and modules provide flexibility and versatility for the termination and management of voice, data, and video connections.
 
Active solutions distribute service inside the premise through electronic devices. Suttle’s active service solutions allow the distribution of service at higher speeds regardless of media, using technologies under FutureLink™ brand products. Passive solutions provide traditional telephony and broadband technology deployments. Through our highly recognized brands — SpeedStar™ and Corroshield® as well as our new brand for higher speeds FutureLink™ — Suttle provides the right solution for wired distribution.

Markets and Marketing

Suttle markets its outside plant and premise distribution products globally to telecommunications companies.  Suttle has a solid history of offering long-term solutions to some of the largest global providers by understanding the customer’s needs and providing innovative solutions coupled with strong customer support. Suttle also markets its products to service providers, residential builders, and low-voltage installers   through distributors and the Company’s sales staff. Suttle reaches its targeted customers through a variety of marketing media including trade shows, associations, advertising, social media and the Suttle website.

Suttle recently changed its domain name for electronic communications to SuttleSolutions.com to emphasize our focus on end-to-end customer oriented solutions for communication service providers.

Customers

Suttle’s customers include the major communication companies globally, including both telephone and cable service provider companies. The Company’s major telephone company customers include Verizon, ATT, and CenturyLink. Suttle serves these major telephone companies directly by Suttle’s sales staff and through a select group of distributors. Sales (including DSL) to the major telephone companies, as a group, both directly and through distribution, represented 84% of Suttle’s sales in 2014 and 80% in 2013.
 
3

 

 

 
Other customers include smaller telephone companies, electrical/low-voltage contractors, home builders, and a nationwide network of distributors. Suttle serves these customers primarily through distributors, but also directly through its sales staff. Sales to cable customers and original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) are made through the nationwide network of distributors and through the Suttle sales staff. Sales to OEMs and other distributors were 9% of Suttle’s sales in 2014 and 11% in 2013. Sales to international customers and other customers represented 7% of Suttle’s sales in 2014 and 9% in 2013.

Competition

Suttle encounters strong competition in all its product lines and competes primarily on the basis of the broad lines of products offered, product performance, quality, price, delivery, and customer support. In addition, distributors of Suttle’s products also market products for one or more of its competitors.

Order Book

Suttle manufactures its products on the basis of estimated customer requirements.  Outstanding customer orders at March 1, 2015 were approximately $2,356,000 compared to approximately $2,008,000 at March 1, 2014.  New orders are generally filled within 60 days. Suttle does not believe its order book is a significant indicator of longer term future results.

Manufacturing and Sources of Supply

Suttle manufactures its products using plastic or metal parts, wire sub-assemblies, fasteners, brackets, electronic circuit boards and other components, most of which are fabricated by Suttle. There are multiple sources of supply for the materials and parts required and the Company is not dependent upon any single supplier, except that Suttle’s corrosion-resistant products use a moisture-resistant gel-filled fig available only from Tyco Electronics Connectivity. Although Suttle has not generally experienced significant problems in obtaining its required supplies, from time to time it experiences spot shortages and additional order lead times are required from its offshore suppliers.

Research and Development: Patents

Suttle continually monitors industry requirements and creates new products to improve its existing product line. Although Suttle has historically not relied significantly on patents to protect its competitive position, as a result of duplication of its designs by foreign apparatus manufacturers, Suttle has begun to apply for design patents on a number of its new products.

Research and development consists primarily of designing, prototyping, and testing of equipment and supplies associated with enhancing existing products and developing new products. Research and development costs are expensed when incurred and were $3,670,000 in 2014 compared to $483,000 in 2013.

Intellectual Property
The Suttle brand name is a trademark important to its business. Suttle regularly supports this name by trade advertising and believes it is well known in the marketplace. Other important trademarks include FutureLink TM brand umbrella for e nd-to-end products for outside plant, connectivity and premise distribution; plastic MediaMAX TM and metal SOHO Access™ for small office and home office enclosures and modules ; SpeedStar TM for passive premise connectivity; and CorroShield ® brand gel that prevents network corrosion.
 
( ii) Transition Networks, Inc.

Transition Networks, Inc. (“Transition” or “Transition Networks”) is based in Minnetonka, Minnesota and also maintains operations in the U.K. Transition designs, assembles and markets media converters, NIDs, network interface cards (NICs), Ethernet switches, Small Form Factor Pluggable modules (SFP), and other connectivity products under the Transition Networks and MILAN brand names. Transition sells its products through distributors, resellers, integrators, and OEMs. These media converters, NIDs, and Ethernet Switch products allow network operators to transmit voice and data across networks and between copper-wired and fiber-optic equipment. Sales by Transition Networks were $43,174,000 (36% of consolidated sales) in 2014 compared to $43,857,000 (33% of consolidated sales) in 2013. International sales accounted for 27% of Transition’s sales, or $11,645,000 in 2014, compared to $13,196,000, or 30% of Transition’s sales in 2013. 
 
4

 

 

 
Products

Transition Networks designs, assembles and sells media converter devices, NIDs, Ethernet switches and other connectivity products that make it possible to transmit telecommunications signals across networks and between systems using different types of media (for example, between copper and fiber optic networks). These products enable customers to integrate fiber optics into their existing network infrastructure as their networks grow, and extend data services to customers at remote locations. Protocols supported include: 10 Gigabit Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Ethernet, T1/E1, DS3, Circuit Emulation Services (TDM or ISDN over Ethernet or IP), RS232, RS485, OC3, OC12, and more. Transition Networks develops product hardware and software internally, and expenses the related costs as they are incurred.  In connection with the sale of its hardware products, Transition Networks provides its customers with a variety of software management options including powerful Orchestration and Element Management System (EMS) software for providing superior service provisioning and monitoring of next-generation Carrier Ethernet 2.0 Services.  The Company has been developing and marketing Ethernet-based networking products for approximately 28 years. Transition Networks continues to develop products that address the enterprise, service provider, industrial, government, and security markets.

Manufacturing and Sources of Supply

Transition Networks uses contract manufacturers to manufacture its products in different geographical locations. In 2014, 53% of the total value of its products was manufactured in Asia while the remaining 47% was manufactured in the US. Offshore sources of supply are subject to certain risks, including political risk. The Company has alternate sources of supply for its products in different geographical locations and to date has not had problems obtaining necessary product.

Markets and Marketing

Transition Networks’ products are used in a broad array of markets  including the federal government, enterprise, service provider, industrial, and surveillance markets. Transition Networks has a broad customer base and its products are used in a variety of applications.

The media conversion product line is used in several applications. The ION and Point System™ chassis-based modular systems are used primarily in telecommunications closets for high-density applications and when multiple protocols need to be supported. Stand-alone media converters are used typically at a workstation or for lower density applications. The line of Ethernet switches is used in last mile access, backhaul, central closet and at the end user stations.  The Carrier Ethernet NID line of products addresses the high quality access requirements for both business services and wireless backhaul data communications and telecommunications applications.

Marketing primarily consists of direct marketing using a sales force, tradeshows, trade magazine advertising, on-line advertising, website, email, social media and public relations activities. Transition Networks also provides and participates in advertising and cooperative marketing campaigns with distribution partners.

The Company’s “Transition Networks” and “MILAN” brand names are important to its business. The Company regularly supports these names by trade advertising and believes them to be well known in the marketplace.

Research and Development

Transition Networks develops products for the federal government, enterprise, service provider, security and industrial markets. This includes developing converters for emerging protocols and existing protocols in new markets, as well as new industry standards. Some of these products include remote management devices built on the IEEE® 802.3AH, 802.3AG, ITU-T Y.1731 standards, Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF)® and MEF 2.0 standards, and Power Over Ethernet devices based on the IEEE® 802.3AF and  IEEE® 802.3AT standards. Some design efforts are paced by the development of critical components such as integrated circuits and optical transceivers.

Research and development consists primarily of designing, prototyping, and testing of equipment and supplies associated with enhancing existing products and developing new products. Research and development costs are expensed when incurred and were $4,166,000 in 2014 compared to $2,277,000 in 2013. Transition Networks significantly accelerated its research and development activities in 2014 to improve its product portfolio.
 
5

 

 

 
Transition Networks’ conducts its research and development operations in the United States and the United Kingdom. The US location has a global engineering and product development leadership responsibility. The UK facility was added in 2011 as a result of the Patapsco acquisition. The UK location focuses on engineering and support for Circuit Emulation Products as well as logistics and sales activities.

Competition

Transition Networks faces strong competition across its entire product line. A large number of competitors exist for high volume products in the Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet families, as well as the NIDs. Low cost competitors from China and Taiwan are strongest in Asian, Europe, Middle East, and Africa (EMEA) and South American markets, but have had limited success in the North American market for the media converter products. Transition Networks also faces new competitors as it enters new markets for industrial products, security market, and higher performance devices for the service provider market.

Order Book

Outstanding customer orders for Transition Networks products were approximately $1,683,000 at March 1, 2015 and $2,389,000 at March 1, 2014.  Transition Networks orders are fulfilled on a relatively short-term basis and therefore the Company does not consider the order book as a significant indicator of longer term future results.

( iii) JDL Technologies, Inc.

JDL Technologies, Inc. (“JDL Technologies” or “JDL”), based in Fort Lauderdale, Florida, is a managed service provider and value-added reseller, supplying  information technology (IT) solutions focused on IT service and support management; network design, deployment and integration; cloud and virtualization services; and network operations center management. JDL’s 2014 sales were $8,567,000 (7% of consolidated sales) compared to 2013 sales of $33,116,000 (25% of consolidated sales). Project revenue totaled $6,836,000 in 2014 or 80% of JDL sales compared to $31,698,000 in 2013 or 96% of JDL sales. Managed services revenues grew to $1,731,000 in 2014 from $1,418,000 in 2013.

Competitive Strategy

While the Florida information technology market includes a number of other managed service providers (MSPs) and value-added resellers (VARs), JDL has differentiated itself in several strategic ways during more than 15 years of operations, and is well qualified to help organizations optimize their information technology.

 
JDL is committed to helping IT professionals keep their technology up and running, fix problems quickly, support their user communities, and regularly add new value to their organizations. Key avenues for delivering on this commitment—and distinct competitive advantages—are JDL’s secure, on-premise, state-of-the-art redundant datacenter and managed services operations center. JDL Technologies was recently named to the Elite 150 Managed Service Providers in North America, part of The Channel Company’s 2015 MSP 500 list. JDL also holds the MSP Trustmark credential from CompTIA and is a member of the MSP Alliance.

 
JDL’s portfolio of technology solutions continues to expand to reflect the constant introduction of new technologies and  growing demand among businesses for current solutions to strengthen their competitive edge and continuity. With its team of professionally certified engineers, more than 300 years of technical experience, and talented leadership, JDL Technologies develops best-of-breed IT solutions that effectively meet these demands.  JDL was named to the 2014 CRN Solution Provider 500.

 
Augmenting its own exceptional bench strength, JDL maintains active partnerships with industry leaders such as Cisco, Citrix, EMC, HP, Sophos and VMware, as well as younger technology innovators like Aerohive, All Medical Solutions, Bradford Networks, Nutanix and RingCentral. These strategic partnerships enable JDL to leverage a comprehensive array of proven technologies to provide solutions that meet each client’s specific needs.
 
6

 

 

 
As a result of these combined factors, JDL Technologies has become a trusted advisor to a wide range of clients throughout Florida, earning important incremental business and solid references. In particular, JDL continues to grow its managed services base, successfully attracting enterprise clients with multiple locations in Florida and throughout the U.S. and generating steadily increasing recurring monthly revenues.

Targeted Vertical Markets

Looking beyond its deep roots in the public education sector, in 2012 JDL began to aggressively expand into select other verticals, including the healthcare and general commercial enterprise markets.

Education:
Since JDL Technologies was formed, its largest client has been the School Board of Broward County, Florida (SBBC), the sixth largest public school system in the United States. JDL staffs and manages the SBBC network operations center, which monitors all network elements (servers, switches, routers) and more than 60,000 computers in 265 buildings. In 2014, Broward chose JDL to install wireless networks for its schools, with wireless access points being installed in every classroom as funding becomes available.  Currently, more than 5,523 access points are installed and in service,

JDL monitors Florida’s public school districts for requests for proposals, and actively bids on all work for which it is qualified. As a result, JDL won bids to perform wireless infrastructure projects for Monroe County and DeSoto County Public Schools in 2014.

Healthcare:
JDL continues to aggressively pursue the $1.3 billion healthcare market in Florida, using HIPAA compliance training seminars and HIPAA-required security risk assessments to acquire clients and position for additional IT services sales, including managed services. More than 30 security risk assessments were completed in 2014, and the company will hire an additional HIPAA Security Analyst to support sales growth in 2015.  Strategically, JDL is beginning to segment its training and solutions for small practices, larger providers including medical centers and regional hospitals, and suppliers (known as Business Associates in HIPAA parlance) who are also bound by HIPAA requirements. The company has a robust managed services practice in the healthcare market, with clients ranging from small single-office practices to multi-location regional specialists to medical insurance providers.

Commercial:
Among commercial enterprises, JDL Technologies continues to build a solid roster of diverse clients that include the following examples, along with incremental revenues from additional projects:

 
-  
A 60-year-old Florida financial institution with two dozen branches and more than $4 billion in assets;
 
-  
A global fitness program whose 14 million followers take weekly classes in over 100,000 locations ;
 
-  
The largest private international bank in South America;
 
-  
Several of the largest construction firms in Florida; and
 
-  
A well-funded non-profit organization with 19 locations in the continental U.S.
 
Technology Solutions

As a managed service provider and value-added reseller, JDL Technologies specializes in delivering information technology solutions that enable organizations to focus on the mission-critical activities that drive their success. JDL’s IT solutions encompass an extensive range of networking, virtualization, cloud and infrastructure  services, many of which are available under ongoing JDL management to conserve client IT resources and generate monthly recurring revenues for JDL. As information technology continues to evolve, JDL is committed to retaining its position on the leading edge by ensuring its engineers are trained and certified in the newest technology solutions.

Managed Services:
JDL Technologies continues to expand its reach as a Managed Service Provider, growing its client base beyond South Florida to achieve a greater nationwide presence in just two years.  The company offers a managed service program designed specifically for the healthcare market, and others for the commercial and education markets.  Programs offer network management, availability assurance, event alerting and incident management; server, workstation, mobile device and other asset management; software patching and other security services; help desk support for client users; SIP trunking; migration, conversion and vendor management, as well as  technical consulting services and training.
 
7

 

 

 
Network Services:
The JDL team has extensive experience in assessing, designing and implementing wired and wireless networks, as well as entire IT infrastructures. Networking services also include MPLS, private line and IP, network and endpoint security, network tuning and cabling/wiring services. Public school districts and healthcare offices, in particular, are actively leveraging wireless networks to simplify their communications systems, reduce their technology footprint in confined spaces, and lower maintenance costs. Wireless networking deployments will be increasingly demanded by school systems as the modernized E-Rate program enables funding for managed wireless networks, or wireless as a service, in addition to more traditional wireless projects.

Cloud Solutions:
JDL cloud services range from storage, backup and recovery to hosted PBX, hosted contact center services and hosted email services, all billable as monthly recurring revenue. Many clients are opting to move elements of their infrastructures to the cloud for the benefits of vertical and horizontal scalability, internal bandwidth conservation and other advantages.  Cloud services are also attractive for simplifying IT management for staffs with limited or overtaxed IT resources.

Virtualization:
JDL’s talented virtualization engineers assess, design, deploy, and manage virtualization programs that ensure client access to any workload, anytime, anywhere, on any device.  Virtualization may encompass desktops, servers, applications, storage or any combination, including connectivity and software licensing. Businesses gain the advantages of economies of scale, enhanced security, and disaster recovery protections that are inherent in virtualized environments.

Order Book and Recent Orders

Outstanding customer orders and contracts for JDL products and services were approximately $3,448,000 at March 1, 2015 and $1,501,000 at March 1, 2014.  The Company does not consider current outstanding orders and contracts as a significant indicator of longer term future results.

On March 9, 2015, the Company announced that JDL Technologies, Inc., had been awarded a new contract by the School Board of Broward County to provide Local Area Network, Wireless Local Area Network and data center upgrades, among other IT services, to the public K-12 schools of Broward County, Florida.  The Company estimates that the contract has the potential to generate up to approximately $83 million of revenue over the next five years.  Although JDL Technologies expects to begin providing services under the contact in the second quarter of calendar 2015, JDL Technologies and the School Board of Broward County have not finalized the timing of the services that will be delivered under the contract.
 
(2)   Employment Levels

As of March 1, 2015 the Company employed 578 people.  Of this number, 406 were employed by Suttle (including 115 in Hector, Minnesota, 289 in Costa Rica and 2 in the U.K.), 122 by Transition Networks, Inc. (106 in Minnetonka, MN and 16 in the U.K.), 35 by JDL Technologies, Inc.,  and 15 corporate general and administrative positions.
 
8

 

 

 
(3)   Executive Officers of Registrant

The executive officers of the Company and their ages at March 1, 2015 are set forth below.  See Item 9B of this Form 10-K for additional information on the Company’s management.
 
  Name   Age   Position 1  
         
  Roger H.D. Lacey 64   Vice-Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer [2014] 2
         
  Edwin C. Freeman 59   Vice President, Treasurer and Chief Financial  Officer [2013] 3
         
 
Bruce Blackwood
52
 
President and General Manager, Suttle, Inc. [2007] 4
         
 
Scott Otis
53
 
President and General Manager, Transition Networks, Inc. [2013] 5
         
 
Scott Fluegge
45
 
President and General Manager, JDL Technologies, Inc [2011] 6
         
 
George Wakileh
49
 
Vice President of Technology Development, Suttle, Inc. [2009] 7
         
 
Kristin A. Hlavka
33
 
Corporate Controller [2011] 8
 

1  
Dates in brackets indicate year in which officers began serving in such capacity.  Executive officers serve at the pleasure of the Board of Directors.

2
Mr. Lacey has been a director of the Company since 2008, was appointed Vice Chair in September 2013, and was appointed Interim Chief Executive Officer in June 2014.  On February 27, 2015 he was appointed as the Company’s Chief Executive Officer.  Mr. Lacey was Senior Vice President of Strategy and Corporate Development for 3M Corporation from 2009 until his retirement in 2013.  In addition, from 2000 until his retirement, he was 3M Corporation’s Chief Strategy Officer and head of mergers and acquisitions.

3
Mr. Freeman was appointed Chief Financial Officer in September 2013.  From March 1992 to September 2013, he held management positions within operations and finance at Bro-Tex Co., Inc, a private company that distributes non-woven materials, most recently serving as the Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. Prior to his appointment as Chief Financial Officer, he served as a director of CSI since 1988.

4  
Mr. Blackwood was appointed Vice President and General Manager of Suttle in December 2007, and was named President and General Manager in September 2013.  From July 2001 to November 2007 he served as Suttle’s Vice President of Sales.  Prior to July 2001 he was Vice President of Sales for Americable.

5  
Mr. Otis was appointed President and General Manager of Transition Networks in September 2013. From December 2010 to June 2011 he served as Vice President, Operations - Professional Services for TE Connectivity, Inc. Prior to December 2010, he was the Vice President, Marketing and Business Development – ADC Professional Services.

6  
Mr. Fluegge was appointed Vice President and General Manager of JDL Technologies in December 2011, and was named President and General Manager in September 2013. Prior to this, he was the Vice President of Workload Automation at GSS AMERICA / GSS INFOTECH / INFOSPECTRUM CONSULTING.

7  
Mr. Wakileh has been Suttle’s Global Vice President of Technology and Business Development since 2009.  In addition, in June 2014 he was designated as the Company’s Corporate Scientist, with responsibility for developing strategy for and leading technology development throughout the Company. Mr. Wakileh has over 20 years’ experience in telecommunications technology development and strategy.

8  
Ms. Hlavka was appointed Corporate Controller in May 2011. From July 2008 to April 2011, she served as the Assistant Corporate Controller.  Prior to July 2008, she was an auditor for Deloitte and Touche, LLP.

9

 

 


 (d) FINANCIAL INFORMATION ABOUT FOREIGN AND DOMESTIC OPERATIONS AND EXPORT SALES

Financial information about domestic and foreign operations and export sales may be obtained by reference to Note 11 of the “Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements” under Item 8 herein.
 
ITEM 1A. RISK FACTORS
 
Forward Looking Statements
 
Certain statements contained in this Annual Report on Form 10-K are “forward-looking” statements within the meaning of and in reliance on the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, which provides a “safe harbor” for forward-looking statements.  Actual events and results may differ materially from those expressed or forecasted in forward-looking statements due to a number of factors.  The principal important risk factors that could cause our actual performance and future events and actions to differ materially from these forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to, the risk factors discussed below.
 
Risks Related to Our Business
 
The primary markets we serve are highly competitive, and our ability to compete requires continual focus on delivering high-quality, competitively priced products and services and the regular introduction of new products and services that meet evolving customer requirements.
 
Competition in the markets for voice and data communications products is intense. Our ability to compete with other manufacturers of these products depends primarily on our engineering, manufacturing and marketing skills; the price, quality and reliability of our products; our delivery and service capabilities; and our control of operating expenses. Our JDL subsidiary also experiences intense competition from other providers of IT products and services. We have experienced, and anticipate continuing to experience, pricing pressures from our customers as well as our competitors. The markets we serve are characterized by rapid technological advances and evolving industry standards. These markets can be significantly affected by new product introductions and marketing activities of industry participants. Some of our competitors and potential competitors have greater financial, technological, manufacturing, marketing, and personnel resources than we. Present and future competitors may be able to identify new markets and develop new products that are superior to those developed by us. They may also adapt new technologies faster, devote greater resources to research and development, promote products more aggressively, and price products more competitively than we. We cannot ensure that competition will not intensify or that we will be able to compete effectively in the markets in which we compete.
 
We face many challenges in maintaining acceptable margins, and our level of gross margin may not be sustainable.
 
Gross margins among our products and services vary and are subject to fluctuation from quarter to quarter.  The factors that may affect our gross margins adversely are numerous and include:
 
 
  
Changes in customer, geographic, or product mix;
 
 
Our ability to reduce product costs;
 
 
Increases in material or labor costs;
 
 
Expediting costs incurred to meet customer delivery requirements;
 
 
Excess inventory and inventory carrying charges;
 
10

 

 

 
 
Obsolescence charges;
 
 
Changes in shipment volume;
 
 
Changes in component pricing;
 
 
Increased price competition;
 
 
Changes in distribution channels;
 
 
Lower margins on competitive-bid contracts;
 
 
Increased warranty cost; and
 
 
Our ability to manage the impact of foreign currency exchange rate fluctuations.
 
Consolidation among our customers has occurred and further consolidation may occur, resulting in the loss of some customers and reducing revenue during the pendency of business combinations and related integration activities.
 
We believe future consolidation may occur among our customers as they attempt to increase market share and achieve greater economies of scale. Consolidation has affected our business as our customers focus on completing business combinations and integrating their operations. In some instances, customers integrating large-scale acquisitions have reduced their purchases of our products as they integrate.
 
The business impact to us of significant customer mergers is likely to be unclear until sometime after these transactions are completed. After a consolidation occurs, a customer may choose to reduce the number of vendors from which it purchases equipment and may choose one of our competitors as its preferred vendor. We cannot ensure that we will continue to supply equipment to the surviving communications service provider after a business combination is completed.
 
Our profitability could be affected negatively if one or more of our key customers substantially reduces orders for our products or transitions their purchases towards lower gross margin products.
 
A large portion of our revenues is derived from a relatively small number of customers, with our top ten customers accounting for 72%, 83% and 76% of net sales for 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively. In fiscal 2014, 2013 and 2012, AT&T accounted for approximately 33%, 24% and 17% of our sales, respectively. Another one of our largest customers, Verizon, accounted for 6%, 8% and 8% of our net sales for the years 2014, 2013 and 2012. If we lose a significant customer for any reason, our sales and gross profit will be negatively affected.
 
Our market is subject to rapid technological change and, to compete effectively, we must continually introduce new products that achieve market acceptance.
 
The communications equipment industry is characterized by rapid technological changes, evolving industry standards, changing market conditions, short product life cycles and rapidly changing customer requirements and frequent new product and service introductions and enhancements. The introduction of products using new technologies or the adoption of new industry standards can make our existing products, or products under development, obsolete or unmarketable. Our future success will depend on our ability to enhance our existing products, to introduce new products to meet changing customer requirements and emerging technologies, and to demonstrate the performance advantages and cost-effectiveness of our products over competing products. Our failure to modify our products to support new alternative technologies or failure to achieve widespread customer acceptance of these modified products could cause us to lose market share and cause our revenues to decline.
 
We may not predict technological trends or the success of new products in the communications equipment market accurately. New product development often requires forecasting of market trends, development and implementation of new technologies and processes and substantial capital commitments. We do not know whether other new products we develop will gain market acceptance or result in profitable sales.
 
Some competitors have greater engineering and product development resources than we have. Although we expect to continue to invest significant resources in product development activities, our efforts to achieve and maintain profitability will require us to be selective and focused with our research and development expenditures. If we fail to anticipate or respond in a cost-effective and timely manner to technological developments, changes in industry standards or customer requirements, or if we experience any significant delays in product development or introduction, our business, operating results and financial condition could be affected adversely.
 
11

 

 

 
We may experience delays in developing and marketing product enhancements or new products that respond to technological change, evolving industry standards and changing customer requirements. We cannot ensure that we will not experience difficulties that could delay or prevent the successful development, introduction, and marketing of these products or product enhancements, or that our new products and product enhancements will adequately meet the requirements of the marketplace and achieve any significant or sustainable degree of market acceptance in existing or additional markets. In addition, the future introductions or announcements of products by us or one of our competitors embodying new technologies or changes in industry standards or customer requirements could render our then-existing products obsolete or unmarketable. We cannot ensure that the introduction or announcement of new product offerings by us or one or more of our competitors will not cause customers to defer their purchase of our existing products, which could cause our revenues to decline.
 
Our business units are dependent upon federal government spending.
 
Our JDL Technologies and Transition Networks business units are involved in projects that receive much of their funding from the United States federal government.  To the extent that federal government spending is delayed or curtailed by government actions, our revenues and operating results may be adversely affected.
 
We evaluate and frequently pursue acquisitions, but we may not successfully close these acquisitions and, if these acquisitions are completed, we may have difficulty integrating the acquired businesses with our existing operations.
 
We regularly consider the acquisition of complementary companies and product lines.  We cannot, however, ensure that we will be able to find appropriate candidates for acquisitions, reach agreement to acquire them, or obtain requisite shareholder or regulatory approvals needed to close strategic acquisitions, despite the effort and management attention invested.
 
The impact of future acquisitions on our business, operating results and financial condition is uncertain. In the case of businesses we may acquire in the future, we may have difficulty assimilating these businesses and their products, services, technologies and personnel into our operations. These difficulties could disrupt our ongoing business, distract our management and workforce, increase our expenses and materially adversely affect our operating results and financial condition. Also, we may not be able to retain key management and other critical employees after an acquisition. We may also acquire unanticipated liabilities. In addition to these risks, we may not realize all of the anticipated benefits of these acquisitions.
 
Our operating results fluctuate from quarter to quarter.
 
Our operating results are difficult to predict and may fluctuate significantly from quarter to quarter. Fluctuations in our quarterly operating results may be caused by many factors, including the following:
 
 
the volume of customer orders and our ability to fulfill those orders in a timely manner;
 
 
the overall level of capital expenditures by our customers;
 
 
work stoppages and other developments affecting the operations of our customers;
 
 
the timing of and our ability to obtain new customer contracts;
 
 
the timing of revenue recognition;
 
 
the timing of new product and service introductions;
 
 
the availability of products and services;
 
 
market acceptance of new and enhanced versions of our products and services;
 
 
variations in the mix of products and services we sell;
 
 
the timing of federal and state government funding of projects;
 
12

 

 

 
 
the location and utilization of our production capacity and employees; and
 
 
the availability and cost of key components of our products.
 
Our expense levels are based in part on expectations of future revenues. If revenue levels in a particular quarter are lower than expected, our operating results will be affected adversely.
 
We depend on manufacturing relationships and on limited-source suppliers and any disruptions in these relationships may cause damage to our customer relationships.
 
We procure all parts and certain services involved in the production of our products from, and subcontract much of our product manufacturing to outside firms that specialize in these services. Although most of the components of our products are available from multiple vendors, we have several single-source supplier relationships, either because alternative sources are not available or because the relationship is advantageous to us. We cannot ensure that our suppliers will be able to meet our future requirements for products and components in a timely fashion. In addition, the availability of many of these components to us is dependent in part on our ability to provide our suppliers with accurate forecasts of our future requirements. Delays or lost sales could be caused by other factors beyond our control, including defects in the quality of components or products supplied by others.
 
We are dependent upon our senior management and other critical employees.
 
Like all communications technology companies, our success is dependent on the efforts and abilities of our senior management personnel and other critical employees, including those in sales, marketing and product development functions. Our ability to attract, retain and motivate these employees is critical to our success. In addition, because we may acquire one or more businesses in the future, our success will depend, in part, upon our ability to retain and integrate our own personnel with personnel from acquired entities that are necessary to the continued success or the successful integration of the acquired businesses.
 
Managing our inventory is complex and may include write-downs of excess or obsolete inventory.
 
Managing our inventory of components and finished products is complicated by a number of factors, including the need to maintain a significant inventory of finished goods for orders we anticipate but may not be received.  These issues may cause us to purchase and maintain significant amounts of inventory. If this inventory is not used as expected based on anticipated requirements, it may become excess or obsolete. The existence of excess or obsolete inventory can result in sales price reductions or inventory write-downs, which could adversely affect our business and results of operations.
 
We face risks associated with expanding our sales outside of the United States.
 
We believe that our future growth depends in part upon our ability to increase sales in international markets. These sales are subject to a variety of risks, including fluctuations in currency exchange rates, tariffs, import restrictions and other trade barriers, unexpected changes in regulatory requirements, longer accounts receivable payment cycles and potentially adverse tax consequences, and export license requirements. In addition, we are subject to the risks inherent in conducting business internationally, including political and economic instability and unexpected changes in diplomatic and trade relationships. We cannot ensure that one or more of these factors will not have a material adverse effect on our business strategy and financial condition.
 
Compliance with internal control requirements is expensive and poses certain risks.
 
We expect to incur significant continuing costs, including accounting fees and staffing costs, in order to maintain compliance with the internal control requirements of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. Expansion of our business, particularly internationally, will necessitate ongoing changes to our internal control systems, processes and information systems. In addition, if we complete acquisitions in the future, our ability to integrate operations of the acquired company could impact our compliance with Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. We cannot be certain that as our business changes, our current design for internal control over financial reporting will be sufficient to enable management to determine that our internal controls are effective for any period, or on an ongoing basis.
 
In the future, if we fail to complete the annual Section 404 evaluation in a timely manner, we could be subject to regulatory scrutiny and a loss of public confidence in our internal controls. In addition, any failure to implement required new or improved controls, or difficulties encountered in their implementation, could harm our operating results or cause us to fail to meet our reporting obligations.
 
13

 

 

 
Product defects or the failure of our products to meet specifications could cause us to lose customers and revenue or to incur unexpected expenses.
 
If our products do not meet our customers’ performance requirements, our customer relationships may suffer. Also, our products may contain defects or fail to meet product specifications. Any failure or poor performance of our products could result in:
 
 
delayed market acceptance of our products;
 
 
delayed product shipments;
 
 
unexpected expenses and diversion of resources to replace defective products or identify and correct the source of errors;
 
 
damage to our reputation and our customer relationships;
 
 
delayed recognition of sales or reduced sales; and
 
 
product liability claims or other claims for damages that may be caused by any product defects or performance failures.
 
Our sales and operations may continue to be impacted adversely by current global economic conditions.
 
Over the past several years, financial markets globally have experienced periods of extreme disruption. These have included, among other things, extreme volatility in securities prices, severely diminished liquidity and credit availability, ratings downgrades of some investments and declining valuations of others. The frequency, severity and duration of these disruptions in the financial markets and the global economy are unknown. We cannot ensure that there will not be a further deterioration in financial markets and in business conditions generally. These economic developments have adversely affected our business in a number of ways and will likely continue to adversely affect our business during the foreseeable future.
 
Risks Related to Our Common Stock
 
Our stock price has been volatile historically and the price of our common stock may fluctuate significantly in the future.
 
The trading price of our common stock has been and may continue to be subject to wide fluctuations. Our stock price may fluctuate in response to a number of events and factors, such as quarterly variations in operating results, announcements of technological innovations or new products by us or our competitors, the operating and stock price performance of other companies that investors may deem comparable to us, and new reports relating to trends in our markets or general economic conditions.
 
In addition, the stock market in general, and prices for companies in our industry in particular, have experienced extreme volatility that often has been unrelated to the operating performance of these companies. These broad market and industry fluctuations may adversely affect the price of our common stock, regardless of our operating performance.
 
Anti-takeover provisions in our charter documents, our shareholder rights agreement and Minnesota law could prevent or delay a change in control of our company.
 
Provisions of our articles of incorporation and bylaws, our shareholder rights agreement (also known as a “poison pill”) and Minnesota law may discourage, delay or prevent a merger or acquisition that a shareholder may consider favorable, and could limit the price that investors are willing to pay for our common stock. These provisions include the following:
 
 
advance notice requirements for shareholder proposals;
 
 
authorization for our board of directors to issue preferred stock without shareholder approval;
 
14

 

 

 

 
authorization for our board of directors to issue preferred stock purchase rights upon a third party’s acquisition of 16.5% or more of our outstanding shares of common stock;
 
 
limitations on business combinations with interested shareholders; and
 
 
a super majority vote by shareholders is required to approve certain corporate actions, including merger transactions.
 
Some of these provisions may discourage a future acquisition of our company even though our shareholders would receive an attractive value for their shares, or a significant number of our shareholders believe such a proposed transaction would be in their best interest.
   
ITEM 1B. UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS
None.
   
ITEM 2. PROPERTIES
 
CSI conducts administrative, manufacturing and engineering functions at the following facilities:
 
 
-
In Minnetonka, Minnesota, the Company owns a 105,000 square foot building where its executive and administrative offices are located. In addition, Transition Networks uses this facility for its warehouse, assembly, engineering and administrative operations, JDL Technologies, Inc. uses this facility for some administrative operations, and Suttle uses this facility for its sales, marketing and product development.
 
 
-
Suttle’s manufacturing is conducted at two locations.  At Hector, Minnesota, the Company owns three plants totaling 109,000 square feet of manufacturing space. The Company leases 40,000 square feet of manufacturing space in San Jose, Costa Rica.
 
 
-
Austin Taylor Communications, Ltd. owns a 40,000 square foot facility in Bethesda, Wales, U.K.
 
 
-
Transition Networks leases 7,000 square feet of office space in the U.K. for its Transition Networks, EMEA operations.
 
CSI believes these facilities will be adequate to accommodate its administrative, manufacturing and distribution needs for the foreseeable future.
   
ITEM 3. LEGAL PROCEEDINGS
 
The Company is subject to claims and lawsuits that have been filed in the ordinary course of business.  From time to time, the Company brings suit against others to enforce contract rights or property rights, or to collect debts in the ordinary course of business.  Management believes that the resolution or settlement of currently pending litigation will not have a material adverse effect on the results of operations or liquidity of the Company.
   
ITEM 4. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURES

Not applicable.
 
PART II
   
ITEM 5. MARKET FOR REGISTRANT’S COMMON EQUITY AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER  MATTERS AND ISSUER PURCHASE OF EQUITY SECURITIES
 
(a)           MARKET INFORMATION

The Company’s common stock trades on the NASDAQ under the trading symbol JCS.
 
15

 

 

 
The table below presents the price range of high and low trades of the Company’s common stock for each quarterly period indicated as reported by NASDAQ for 2014 and 2013.
                         
   
2014
   
2013
 
   
High
   
Low
   
High
   
Low
 
First
  $ 13.92     $ 10.78     $ 11.25     $ 9.75  
Second
    13.50       10.75       10.69       9.55  
Third
    13.09       10.68       12.35       9.66  
Fourth
    12.15       10.00       12.25       9.95  
 
 (b)          HOLDERS

At March 1, 2015 there were approximately 563 registered holders of record of Communications Systems, Inc. common stock.

(c)           DIVIDENDS

Communications Systems, Inc. paid regular quarterly dividends to its shareholders on the dates and at the rates indicated below:
       
Payment Date
 
Dividend per Share
 
January 1, 2015
  $ .16  
October 1, 2014
    .16  
July 1, 2014
    .16  
April 1, 2014
    .16  
January 1, 2014
    .16  
October 1, 2013
    .16  
July 1, 2013
    .16  
April 1, 2013
    .16  
December 27, 2012
    .16  

The Company accelerated the payment of the dividend declared in the fourth quarter of 2012 and paid the dividend on December 27, 2012 rather than January 1, 2013.  The payment of future dividends will be determined at the discretion of the Board of Directors.

(d)           INFORMATION REGARDING EQUITY COMPENSATION PLANS

The following table presents information about the Company’s equity compensation plans, under which equity securities of the Company are authorized for issuance, as of December 31, 2014:

Securities Authorized for Issuance Under Equity Compensation Plans
               
   
Number of shares
       
Number of shares of
   
of common stock
       
common stock
   
to be issued upon
       
available for future
   
exercise of
 
Weighted-average
 
issuance under equity
   
outstanding
 
exercise price of
 
compensation plans
   
options, warrants
 
outstanding options
 
(excluding shares in
Plan Category (1)
 
and rights
 
warrants and rights
 
column (a))
               
Equity compensation plans approved by security holders:
         
               
1992 Stock Plan-Employee Plan
 
 22,008
 
$
 14.15
 
1992 Stock Plan-Nonemployee Director Plan
 
 90,000
 
$
 10.56
 
1990 Employee Stock Purchase Plan
 
 4,028
 
$
 9.45
 
 21,483
2011 Executive Incentive Compensation Plan
 
 628,861
 
$
 11.58
 
 321,928
 
16

 

 

 
Equity compensation plans not approved by security holders:
 
None
 
(1)
The Company does not have individual compensation arrangements involving the grant of options, warrants and rights.
 
(e)           FIVE YEAR PERFORMANCE GRAPH

The following graph presents, at the end of each of the Company’s last five fiscal years, the cumulative total return on the common stock of the Company as compared to the cumulative total return reported for the NASDAQ (U.S.), and the NASDAQ Telecommunications Index.  Company information and each index assume the investment of $100 on the last business day before January 1, 2009 and the reinvestment of all dividends.
 
(LINE GRAPH)
                                     
Comparison of Five-Year Cumulative Total Return
 
                                     
Company or Index
 
2009
   
2010
   
2011
   
2012
   
2013
   
2014
 
Communications Systems, Inc.
  $ 100.000     $ 118.455     $ 123.289     $ 96.579     $ 109.726     $ 109.165  
NASDAQ US
    100.000       129.261       151.943       152.417       177.459       236.879  
NASDAQ TELCOM
    100.000       110.924       132.294       139.737       168.433       191.004  
 
(f)            RECENT SALES OF UNREGISTERED SECURITIES

Not applicable.
 
17

 

 

 
(g)           PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS
 
During the three months ended December 31, 2014 the Company repurchased shares of stock as follows:
                         
ISSUER PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES
 
Period
 
Total Number of
Shares (or Units)
Purchased (1)
   
Average Price
Paid per Share
(or Unit)
   
Total Number of Shares
(or Units) Purchased as
Part of Publicly
Announced Plans or
Programs
   
Maximum Number (or Approximate
Dollar Value) of Shares (or Units)
that May Yet Be Purchased Under
the Plans or Programs (2)
 
October 2014
    357     $ 10.75             411,910  
November 2014
    194       11.89             411,910  
December 2014
                      411,910  
Total
    551     $ 11.15             411,910  
 
(1)
The shares in this column represent shares that were surrendered to us by plan participants to satisfy withholding tax obligations related to share-based compensation.
 
(2)
Shares represent remaining amount of a 500,000 share repurchase authorization approved by the Company’s Board in October 2008 and publicly announced in November 2008.
 
18

 

 

 
   
ITEM 6. SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA
 
The following selected financial data has been derived from our consolidated financial statements and should be read in conjunction with the Consolidated Financial Statements and related notes thereto set forth in Item 8 and with “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” included in Item 7 of this Annual Report on Form 10-K.
 
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
SELECTED FINANCIAL INFORMATION
(in thousands, except per share amounts)
                               
   
Year Ended December 31
 
                               
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
   
2011
   
2010
 
                               
Selected Income Statement Data
                             
Sales
  $ 119,071     $ 131,320     $ 104,250     $ 143,775     $ 120,072  
                                         
Costs and Expenses:
                                       
Cost of sales
    76,913       86,421       62,753       84,880       68,872  
Selling, general and administrative expenses
    38,628       36,743       38,101       40,108       35,586  
Impairment loss
          5,850             1,272        
Restructuring expense
    238       1,149                    
Total Costs and Expenses
    115,779       130,163       100,854       126,260       104,458  
Operating Income
    3,292       1,157       3,396       17,515       15,614  
Other (Expense) Income, Net
    (112 )     (53 )     2       105       20  
Income Before Income Taxes
    3,180       1,104       3,398       17,620       15,634  
Income Tax Expense
    1,219       2,061       1,160       7,822       5,919  
Net Income (Loss)
  $ 1,961     $ (957 )   $ 2,238     $ 9,798     $ 9,715  
Basic Net Income (Loss) Per Share
  $ 0.23     $ (0.11 )   $ 0.26     $ 1.16     $ 1.16  
Diluted Net Income (Loss) Per Share
  $ 0.23     $ (0.11 )   $ 0.26     $ 1.15     $ 1.15  
Cash Dividends Declared Per Share
  $ 0.64     $ 0.64     $ 0.64     $ 0.60     $ 0.59  
Average Dilutive Shares Outstanding
    8,640       8,531       8,519       8,496       8,415  
                                         
Selected Balance Sheet Data
                                       
Total Assets
  $ 100,286     $ 103,533     $ 112,535     $ 116,659     $ 109,070  
Property, Plant and Equipment, Net
    18,153       14,941       14,475       14,019       13,214  
Long-term Liabilities
    1,271       1,838       3,298       3,741       5,004  
Stockholders’ Equity
    86,020       88,622       93,995       97,531       91,397  
 
19

 

 

 
   
ITEM 7. MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
 
Overview

Communications Systems, Inc. provides physical connectivity infrastructure products and services for global deployments of broadband networks through the following business units:

Suttle
Founded in 1910, today Suttle is a leader in innovative network solutions that meet service providers’ needs from the central office all the way to the premise through OSP and premise distribution offerings for voice, data and video. Suttle’s product portfolio incorporates the best available technology, leveraging existing infrastructure, and laying the foundation for future growth. Products are designed to comply with the most stringent industry standards. Quality management systems are ISO 9001 and TL9000 certified.

Suttle’s best known brands include SOHO Access TM —a full line of wiring components —and the new FutureLink TM brand of high-speed and tool-less solutions that lower the service providers’ cost of ownership. The newest MediaMAX TM brand provides optimized wired and wireless gigabit connectivity for home and small office structured distribution.

Transition Networks
With over 25 years of growth and expertise in hardware and software development, Transition Networks offers customers the ability to affordably integrate the benefits of fiber optics into any data network, in any application, and in any environment. Offering support for multiple protocols, any interface, and a multitude of hardware platforms, Transition Networks’ portfolio gives customers the power to deliver and manage network traffic reliably over fiber. Based in Minneapolis, Minnesota, Transition Networks distributes hardware-based connectivity solutions exclusively through a network of resellers in over 90 countries.

JDL Technologies
JDL Technologies provides outsourced IT services and infrastructure to the education, healthcare, government and enterprise market segments. JDL’s portfolio of technology solutions includes virtualization, managed services, wired and wireless network design and implementation services, and converged infrastructure configuration and deployment. JDL’s largest customer has traditionally been the School Board of Broward County, Florida (SBBC). JDL runs SBBC’s Network Operation Center that monitors all network elements (servers, switches, routers) and over 60,000 computers in 265 buildings for the nation’s 6th largest school district.

Key 2014 Developments
 
 
The Company’s 2014 sales were $119.1 million, a 9% decrease compared to 2013 sales of $131.3 million.
 
 
The Company’s 2014 net income was $2.0 million, or $0.23 per diluted share, compared to a net loss of $958,000 or ($0.11) per diluted share in fiscal 2013. In 2013, the Company had a $5.8 million goodwill write-off.
 
 
At 2014 year end, the Company had cash, cash equivalents and investments of $29.9 million and positive working capital of $56.9 million.
 
 
Suttle sales increased 24% to $67.3 million in 2014 compared to $54.3 million in 2013, driven in part by an $11.6 million increase in sales of FTTx products.  Suttle’s operating income increased 78% to $6.6 million in 2014 from $3.7 million in 2013.
 
 
Transition Networks sales decreased 2% to $43.2 million in 2014 compared to $43.9 million in 2013.
 
 
Sales by JDL Technologies decreased 74% to $8.6 million in 2014 compared to $33.1 million in 2013. JDL’s 2013 results included almost $23 million in revenues from a large infrastructure project that generated only $119,000 in revenues in 2014.
 
20

 

 

 
Forward Looking Statements

In this report and from time to time, in reports filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, in press releases, and in other communications to shareholders or the investing public, we may make “forward looking statements” within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. We may make these forward looking statements concerning possible or anticipated future financial performance, business activities, plans, pending claims, investigations or litigation, which are typically preceded by the words “believes,” “expects,” “anticipates,” “intends” or similar expressions. For these forward-looking statements, the Company claims the protection of the safe harbor for forward-looking statements contained in federal securities laws. Shareholders and the investing public should understand that these forward looking statements are subject to risks and uncertainties that could cause actual performance, activities, anticipated results, outcomes or plans to differ significantly from those indicated in the forward-looking statements. For a detailed discussion of a number of such risk factors, please see Item 1A above.

Critical Accounting Policies

Inventory Valuation: We value inventories at the lower of cost or market. Reserves for overstock and obsolescence are estimated and recorded to reduce the carrying value to estimated net realizable value. The amount of the reserve is determined based on historical usage, projected sales information, plans for discontinued products and other factors. Though management considers these reserves adequate and proper, changes in sales volumes due to unexpected economic or competitive conditions are among the factors that could materially affect the adequacy of this reserve.

Income Taxes: In the preparation of the Company’s consolidated financial statements, management calculates income taxes. This includes estimating the Company’s current tax liability as well as assessing temporary differences resulting from different treatment of items for tax and book accounting purposes. These differences result in deferred tax assets and liabilities, which are recorded on the balance sheet. These assets and liabilities are analyzed regularly and management assesses the likelihood it will realize these deferred assets from future taxable income. We determine the valuation allowance for deferred income tax benefits based upon the expectation of whether the benefits are more likely than not to be realized. The Company records interest and penalties related to income taxes as income tax expense in the Consolidated Statements of Income.
 
Revenue Recognition : The Company recognizes revenue when the earnings process is complete, evidenced by persuasive evidence of an agreement, delivery has occurred or services have been rendered, the price is fixed or determinable, and collectability is reasonably assured. In the Suttle and Transition Networks segments, the earning process completion is evidenced through the shipment of goods, based on the sales terms of these segments, the risk of loss is transferred upon shipment or delivery to customers and there are no significant obligations subsequent to that point. There are not significant estimates related to revenue recognition for these segments.
 
JDL Technologies records revenue on hardware, software and related equipment sales and installation contracts when the revenue recognition criteria are met and the products are installed and accepted by the customer.  JDL records revenue on service contracts on a straight-line basis over the contract period, unless evidence suggests that the revenue is earned in a different pattern. Each contract is individually reviewed to determine when the earnings process is complete.
 
Results of Operations
 
2014 Compared to 2013

Sales were $119,071,000 in 2014, a 9% decrease from sales of $131,320,000 in 2013.  Operating income increased 185% to $3,293,000 in 2014 as compared to $1,156,000 in 2013.  Income before income taxes increased 188% to $3,181,000 from $1,103,000 in 2013.  Net income increased 305% to $1,962,000 in 2014 compared to a net loss of $958,000 in 2013.
 
21

 

 

 
Suttle Results
 
Suttle sales increased 24% to $67,330,000 in 2014 compared to $54,346,000 in 2013. Sales by product groups in 2014 and 2013 were:
             
   
Suttle Sales by Product Group
 
   
2014
   
2013
 
Modular connecting products
  $ 13,015,000     $ 14,077,000  
DSL products
    6,052,000       8,057,000  
Structured cabling products
    31,916,000       26,900,000  
FTTx products
    16,073,000       4,444,000  
Other products
    274,000       868,000  
    $ 67,330,000     $ 54,346,000  
 
Suttle’s sales by customer groups in 2014 and 2013 were:
             
   
Suttle Sales by Customer Group
 
   
2014
   
2013
 
Telecommunication customers
  $ 56,681,000     $ 43,296,000  
Distributors
    5,882,000       5,938,000  
International
    4,530,000       4,547,000  
Other
    237,000       565,000  
    $ 67,330,000     $ 54,346,000  

The increase in sales is due primarily to increased sales to Suttle’s domestic telecommunication customers. Sales to the telephone companies increased 31% to $56,681,000 in 2014 compared to $43,296,000 in 2013 due to growth in high-speed copper connectivity products and success in securing new business in multiple FTTx domains. Sales to these customers accounted for 84% of Suttle’s sales in 2014 compared to 80% of sales in 2013. Sales to distributors decreased 1% and accounted for 9% of sales in 2014 compared to 11% in 2013. International sales accounted for 7% of Suttle’s 2014 sales and remained stable compared to 2013.

Sales of structured cabling products increased 19% due to increased spending by telecommunication customers. Sales of FTTx products increased 262% due to securing new business in multiple FTTx domains. Modular connecting products sales decreased 8% due to shifts in technology. Sales of DSL products decreased 25% due to the maturation of the market and increased pricing pressures.

Suttle’s gross margin increased 33% to $20,992,000 in 2014 compared to $15,812,000 in 2013. The gross margin percentage increased to 31% in 2014 as compared to 29% in 2013 due to introduction of new FTTx products, focused value engineering and cost optimization efforts, and economies of scale.

Selling, general and administrative expenses increased $2,520,000, or 21% to $14,389,000, or 21.4% of sales, in 2014 compared to $11,869,000 in 2013, or 21.8% of sales, due to investment and recruitment of expertise in sales, operations, technology, product management, and engineering as well as increased expenses associated with the implementation of a new ERP system.

Suttle’s operating income increased 78% to $6,603,000 in 2014 from $3,716,000 in 2013.

Transition Networks

Transition Networks develops, markets, and sells active networking hardware devices. Characteristics of the business include a rapid pace of change in technologies and alternative solutions to our products. Transition Networks derives the majority of its revenues from one-time network upgrade projects. The core markets for these products are enterprise, service providers, government, and industrial users. Roughly 73% of Transition Networks revenue comes from North America, but we continue to see opportunity for long-term growth outside of North America and we will invest resources in sales, marketing, and infrastructure to grow that business.
 
22

 

 

 
Transition Networks sales decreased 2% to $43,174,000 in 2014 compared to $43,857,000 in 2013.  Transition Networks organizes its sales force by vertical markets and segments its customers geographically.  Sales by customer groups in 2014 and 2013 were:
             
    Transition Networks Sales by Region  
   
2014
   
2013
 
North America
  $ 31,529,000     $ 30,661,000  
EMEA
    4,291,000       5,145,000  
Rest of world
    7,354,000       8,051,000  
    $ 43,174,000     $ 43,857,000  

The following table summarizes Transition Networks’ 2014 and 2013 sales by product group:
             
   
Transition Networks Sales by Product Group
 
   
2014
   
2013
 
Media converters
  $ 28,362,000     $ 28,979,000  
Ethernet switches
    4,727,000       4,394,000  
Ethernet adapters
    3,939,000       4,165,000  
Other products
    6,146,000       6,319,000  
    $ 43,174,000     $ 43,857,000  

Sales in North America increased 3% or $868,000 compared to 2013 due to increased sales into the Federal government channel. International sales decreased $1,551,000, or 12%, due mainly to continued sluggish economic activity in Europe.

Gross margin decreased 14% to $19,199,000 in 2014 compared to $22,419,000 in 2013. Gross margin as a percentage of sales decreased to 44% in 2014 compared to 51% in 2013 due to unfavorable product mix and competitive prices.

Selling, general and administrative expenses decreased 1% to $21,393,000, or 49.6% of sales, in 2014 from $21,581,000 in 2013, or 49.2% of sales. Operating loss decreased 51% to $2,432,000 in 2014 compared to an operating loss of $5,012,000 in 2013 due to the write off of goodwill totaling $5,850,000 in the third quarter of 2013.

Transition Networks continues to develop products based on market needs as well as by following industry standards set by such organizations as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) and the Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF).  It also continues to invest in sales and marketing to grow revenues in our target markets and expand sales outside of North America.

JDL Technologies, Inc.

Sales by JDL Technologies, Inc. decreased 74% to $8,567,000 in 2014 compared to $33,116,000 in 2013.  The following table summarizes JDL’s revenues by customer group in 2014 and 2013:
             
   
JDL Revenue by Customer Group
 
   
2014
   
2013
 
Broward County FL schools
  $ 6,504,000     $ 7,928,000  
Miami Dade County FL schools
    119,000       22,988,000  
All other
    1,944,000       2,200,000  
    $ 8,567,000     $ 33,116,000  

Revenues earned in Broward County FL decreased $1,424,000 or 18% in 2014 due to the Federal government’s decision to withhold all priority two E-Rate funding for the current fiscal year, which required the district to find alternate funding sources for planned projects.  Revenues earned in Miami Dade County in 2013 and 2014 were derived from a large E-Rate funded infrastructure project.  This was completed in the first quarter of 2014. Revenue from JDL Technologies’ sales to small and medium sized commercial businesses (SMBs) decreased by 12% or $256,000 as there were fewer large infrastructure transactions completed during the year due to a combination of market trends and JDL’s ongoing emphasis  on higher margin managed services growth.

JDL gross margin decreased 70% to $1,968,000 in 2014 compared to $6,668,000 in 2013. Gross margin as a percentage of sales increased to 23% in 2014 from 20% in 2013 reflecting the fact that a significant portion of its 2013 revenue was hardware-based, rather than its more traditional value-added service.
 
23

 

 

 
Selling, general and administrative expenses decreased 14% in 2014 to $2,846,000, or 33.2% of sales, compared to $3,292,000 in 2013, or 9.9% of sales, due to a decrease in internal costs associated with the higher revenue achieved in the previous year’s E-Rate driven business. Selling, general and administrative expenses as a percentage of sales were much higher in the 2014 period as JDL’s non-variable general and administrative expenses constituted a much higher percentage of the lower 2014 sales. JDL reported an operating loss of $878,000 in 2014 compared to operating income of $3,376,000 in 2013.

Because federal and local funding for investments in IT infrastructure and services for K-12 public schools varies substantially from year to year, JDL Technologies has experienced notable swings in quarterly and annual revenues.  This revenue volatility is expected to continue in future years.  On a positive note, the modernized E-Rate program announced for 2015 and beyond extends funding to managed IT services, including wireless as a service, which JDL Technologies is well-positioned to leverage.  JDL Technologies anticipates that 2015 E-Rate funding will be available toward the end of 2015, although, based on previous funding experience, JDL may not earn any related revenue until early 2016.

On March 9, 2015, the Company announced that its JDL subsidiary has been awarded a network services contract for the public K-12 schools of Broward County Florida.  JDL will be paid for its services from several sources, including proceeds from Broward County bond issuance that was approved in November 2014 and payments from the federal government under the E-Rate program.  Although JDL Technologies expects to begin providing services under the contact in the second quarter of calendar 2015, JDL Technologies and the School Board of Broward County have not finalized the timing of the services that will be delivered under the contract.

To reduce dependence on government funding and its characteristic volatility, JDL Technologies continues to aggressively pursue opportunities to provide managed services, migration to the cloud, virtualization, HIPAA-compliant IT services, and other network and infrastructure services to SMBs with a focus on the healthcare, legal and financial services, and logistics markets. As part of this initiative, JDL Technologies has adopted HIPAA standards that enable JDL to serve healthcare providers as a HIPAA-compliant Business Associate, which constitutes an important competitive advantage.

Other

Income before income taxes increased 188% to $3,181,000 in 2014 compared to $1,103,000 in 2013. The Company’s effective income tax rate was 38% in 2014 compared to 187% in 2013. The 2014 effective rate was higher than the standard rate of 35% due to state income taxes, foreign losses not deductible for U.S. income tax purposes, and the effect of operations conducted in lower foreign tax rate jurisdictions, as explained in Note 10 to the consolidated financial statements.  The 2013 effective rate was higher than the standard rate of 35% due to state income taxes, foreign losses not deductible for U.S. income tax purposes, provisions for interest charges for uncertain income tax positions, the effect of operations conducted in lower foreign tax rate jurisdictions, and the goodwill impairment not deductible for income tax purposes.

2013 Compared to 2012

Sales were $131,320,000 in 2013, a 26% increase from sales of $104,250,000 in 2012.  Operating income decreased 66% to $1,156,000 in 2013 as compared to $3,396,000 in 2012.  Income before income taxes decreased 68% to $1,103,000 from $3,398,000 in 2012.  Net income decreased 143% to a net loss of $958,000 in 2013 compared to income of $2,238,000 in 2012.

Suttle
 
Suttle sales increased 21% to $54,346,000 in 2013 compared to $45,030,000 in 2012. Sales by product groups in 2013 and 2012 were:
             
   
Suttle Sales by Product Group
 
   
2013
   
2012
 
Modular connecting products
  $ 14,077,000     $ 13,428,000  
DSL products
    8,057,000       8,254,000  
Structured cabling products
    26,900,000       18,081,000  
FTTx products
    4,444,000          
Other products
    868,000       5,267,000  
    $ 54,346,000     $ 45,030,000  

24

 

 

 
Suttle’s sales by customer groups in 2013 and 2012 were:
             
   
Suttle Sales by Customer Group
 
   
2013
   
2012
 
Telecommunication customers
  $ 43,296,000     $ 33,645,000  
Distributors
    5,938,000       5,540,000  
International
    4,547,000       5,394,000  
Other
    565,000       451,000  
    $ 54,346,000     $ 45,030,000  

The increase in sales is due primarily to increased sales to Suttle’s domestic telecommunication customers. Sales to these customers increased 29% to $43,296,000 in 2013 compared to $33,645,000 in 2012 due to fulfillment of new contracts for recently introduced Suttle products and increased sales tied to enhanced network deployments by telecommunication service providers. Sales to these customers accounted for 80% of Suttle’s sales in 2013 compared to 75% of sales in 2012. Sales to distributors increased 7% and accounted for 11% of sales in 2013 compared to 12% in 2012. The increase in this customer group is a result of increased opportunities in the domestic market for new single family unit (SFU) and multi-dwelling unit (MDU) construction. International sales accounted for 8% of Suttle’s 2013 sales, but declined 16% compared to 2012. The decrease in sales in this customer group is due to a reduction in revenue from Austin Taylor’s legacy products, including the termination of a non-profitable OEM contract.

Modular connecting products sales increased 5% due to an increase in new MDU construction in the U.S. housing market and an increase in sales tied to enhanced network deployments. Sales of structured cabling products increased 49% due to increased MDU construction activity in the U.S housing market and an increase in sales tied to enhanced network deployments. Sales of DSL products decreased 2% due to the maturation of the market and increased pricing pressures.

Suttle’s gross margin increased 32% to $15,812,000 in 2013 compared to $11,974,000 in 2012. The gross margin percentage increased to 29% in 2013 compared to 27% in 2012 due to product mix changes and increased production levels.

Selling, general and administrative expenses increased $964,000, or 9% to $11,869,000 in 2013 compared to $10,905,000 in 2012 due to continued investment into new product development and market expansion initiatives.

Suttle’s operating income increased 248% to $3,716,000 in 2013 from $1,068,000 in 2012.

Transition Networks

Transition Networks sales decreased 19% to $43,857,000 in 2013 compared to $53,843,000 in 2012.  Transition Networks organizes its sales force by vertical markets and segments its customers geographically.  Sales by customer groups in 2013 and 2012 were:
             
    Transition Networks Sales by Region  
   
2013
   
2012
 
North America
  $ 30,661,000     $ 39,386,000  
EMEA
    5,145,000       5,744,000  
Rest of world
    8,051,000       8,713,000  
    $ 43,857,000     $ 53,843,000  
 
25

 

 

 
The following table summarizes Transition Networks’ 2013 and 2012 sales by product group:
             
   
Transition Networks Sales by Product Group
 
   
2013
   
2012
 
Media converters
  $ 28,979,000     $ 35,817,000  
Ethernet switches
    4,394,000       4,738,000  
Ethernet adapters
    4,165,000       4,948,000  
Other products
    6,319,000       8,340,000  
    $ 43,857,000     $ 53,843,000  

Sales in North America decreased 22% in 2013, or $8,725,000 compared to 2012 due to declines in Federal government spending and delays in certain programs. International sales decreased $1,261,000, or 9%, due to currency fluctuations, project timing and continuing economic problems in certain countries.

Gross margin decreased 20% to $22,419,000 in 2013 compared to $27,995,000 in 2012. Gross margin as a percentage of sales decreased to 51% in 2013 compared to 52% in 2012 due to unfavorable product mix.

Selling, general and administrative expenses decreased 12% to $21,581,000 in 2013 from $24,645,000 in 2012 due to corporate restructuring and cost reduction measures taken throughout the year. Due to the goodwill write-off totaling $5,850,000 in the third quarter of 2013, operating income decreased 250% to an operating loss of $5,012,000 in 2013 compared to operating income of $3,350,000 in 2012.

JDL Technologies, Inc.

Sales by JDL Technologies, Inc. (the Company’s IT services business unit) increased 516% to $33,116,000 in 2013 compared to $5,377,000 in 2012.  The following table summarizes JDL’s revenues by customer group in 2013 and 2012:
             
   
JDL Revenue by Customer Group
 
   
2013
   
2012
 
Broward County FL schools
  $ 7,928,000     $ 3,265,000  
Miami Dade County FL schools
    22,988,000       825,000  
All other
    2,200,000       1,287,000  
    $ 33,116,000     $ 5,377,000  

Revenues earned in Broward County FL increased $4,663,000 or 143% in 2013 due to the E-Rate 15 initiative, which was significantly larger than the prior year’s initiative.  Revenues earned in Miami Dade County are related to the district’s “Bringing Wireless to the Classroom” initiative for which the district was granted federal funding under the E-Rate program to expand wireless connectivity for students and staff.  All other revenues increased $913,000 due to JDL’s concentrated effort to grow its revenues from small to medium sized businesses.

JDL gross margin increased 336% to $6,668,000 in 2013 compared to $1,529,000 in 2012. Gross margin as a percentage of sales decreased to 20% in 2013 from 28% in 2012 reflecting the fact that a significant portion of its 2013 revenue was hardware-based, rather than JDL’s more traditional value-added service.

Selling, general and administrative expenses increased 29% in 2013 to $3,292,000 compared to $2,550,000 in 2012 due to the year over year growth of the sales and administration teams required to manage JDL’s continued expansion in both education and commercial markets. JDL reported operating income of $3,376,000 in 2013 compared to an operating loss of $1,022,000 in 2012.

Other

Income before income taxes decreased 68% to $1,103,000 in 2013 compared to $3,398,000 in 2012. The Company’s effective income tax rate was 187% in 2013 compared to 34% in 2012. The 2013 effective rate was significantly higher than the standard rate of 35% primarily because the Company incurred a $5.8 million goodwill impairment charge in 2013, the majority of which was not deductible for income tax purposes.  Other factors affecting the effective income tax rate include state income taxes, foreign losses not deductible for U.S. income tax purposes, provisions for interest charges for uncertain income tax positions, and the effect of operations conducted in lower foreign tax rate jurisdictions.  The 2012 effective rate was lower than the standard rate of 35% due to state income taxes, the release of valuation allowance placed on foreign net operating losses, and the effect of operations conducted in lower foreign tax rate jurisdictions.
 
26

 

 

 
    Acquisitions and Dispositions

The Company is a growth-oriented manufacturer of telecommunications connecting and networking devices.  The Company continually searches for acquisition candidates with products that will enable the Company to better serve its target markets.
 
Effects of Inflation

Inflation has not had a significant effect on operations in recent years.  The Company does not have long-term production or procurement contracts and has historically been able to adjust pricing and purchasing decisions to respond to inflationary pressures.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

As of December 31, 2014, the Company had approximately $29,880,000 in cash, cash equivalents and investments. Of this amount, $1,073,000 was invested in short-term money market funds that are not considered to be bank deposits and are not insured or guaranteed by the FDIC or other government agency. These money market funds seek to preserve the value of the investment at $1.00 per share; however, it is possible to lose money investing in these funds. The remainder in cash and cash equivalents is operating cash and certificates of deposit, which are fully insured through the FDIC. The Company also had $16,143,000 in investments consisting of certificates of deposit and corporate notes and bonds that are traded on the open market and are classified as available-for-sale at December 31, 2014.

The Company had working capital of $56,911,000, consisting of current assets of approximately $69,906,000 and current liabilities of $12,995,000 at December 31, 2014 compared to working capital of $70,599,000, consisting of current assets of $83,672,000 and current liabilities of $13,073,000 at the end of 2013.  The Company’s working capital at December 31, 2014 decreased from the prior year-end as the Company increased its ownership of long-term investments to $11,540,000 from $3,921,000.

Cash flow provided by operating activities was approximately $12,172,000 in 2014 compared to $773,000 provided by operations in 2013.  Significant working capital changes from 2013 to 2014 included a decrease in receivables of $9,057,000 due to the collection of outstanding receivables by JDL Technologies related to the Miami Dade project primarily completed in 2013 and an increase in Suttle-related inventory and related accounts payable.

Cash provided by investing activities was $12,048,000 of cash in 2014 compared to cash used of $5,775,000 in 2013. The Company continued to make capital investments and purchases of certificates of deposit and other marketable securities, moving more of its capital into longer term investments.

Net cash used by financing activities was $6,301,000 in 2014 compared to $4,390,000 in 2013. The Company made $566,000 in contingent consideration payments related to the Patapsco acquisition in 2011. There are no future contingent consideration payments related to this acquisition. Cash dividends paid on common stock increased to $5,572,000 in 2014 ($0.64 per common share) from $4,099,000 in 2013 ($0.48 per common share) due to an accelerated payment of the dividend declared and paid in December 2012.  Proceeds from common stock issuances, principally shares sold to the Company’s Employee Stock Ownership Plan and under the Company’s Employee Stock Purchase Plan, totaled approximately $246,000 in 2014 and $311,000 in 2013, net of acquisitions of Company stock from employees in order to satisfy withholding tax obligations related to share-based compensation, pursuant to terms of Board and shareholder-approved compensation plans. The Company did not repurchase any shares in 2014 or 2013 under the Board authorized program.  At December 31, 2014, Board of Director authority to purchase approximately 411,910 additional shares remained in effect.

As part of the acquisition of the new Minnetonka headquarters building in July 2007, the Company assumed an outstanding mortgage of $4,380,000. The mortgage is payable in monthly installments and carries an interest rate of 6.83%. The mortgage matures on March 1, 2016. Mortgage payments on principal totaled $490,000 during 2014. The outstanding balance on the mortgage was $628,000 at December 31, 2014.
 
The Company expects that the effective income tax rate for fiscal 2015 will be approximately 33%.
 
27

 

 


The Company had no outstanding obligations under its line of credit at December 31, 2014 and 2013, and the Company’s entire credit line ($10,000,000 at March 1, 2015) is available for use. Interest on borrowings on the credit line is at LIBOR plus 1.1% (1.4% at December 31, 2014). There were no borrowings on the line of credit during 2014 or 2013. The credit agreement expires October 31, 2016 and is secured by assets of the Company.  In the opinion of management, based on the Company’s current financial and operating position and projected future expenditures, sufficient funds are available to meet the Company’s anticipated operating and capital expenditure needs.

Contractual Obligation Summary

The following table summarizes our contractual obligations at December 31, 2014 and the effect these obligations are expected to have on our liquidity and cash flow in future periods:
                         
   
Less than
               
More Than
 
   
One Year
   
1 – 3 Years
   
3 – 5 Years
   
5 Years
 
Long-term debt
  $ 524,000     $ 104,000     $     $  
Interest on long-term debt
    27,000       1,000              
Pensions
    268,000       262,000       284,000       801,000  
Operating leases
    290,000       86,000                
Total
  $ 1,109,000     $ 453,000     $ 284,000     $ 801,000  

As of December 31, 2014, the Company had no other material commitments (either cancelable or non-cancelable) for capital expenditures, short or long term debt, capital leases or other purchase commitments related to ongoing operations.

New Accounting Pronouncements

See Note 1 of the “Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements” under Item 8 herein for a discussion of new accounting standards.
 
Off Balance Sheet Arrangements

None.
   
ITEM 7A. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK
 
The Company has no freestanding or embedded derivatives.  The Company’s policy is to not use freestanding derivatives and to not enter into contracts with terms that cannot be designated as normal purchases or sales.
 
The vast majority of our transactions are denominated in U.S. dollars; as such, fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates have historically not been material to the Company.  At December 31, 2014 our bank line of credit carried a LIBOR rate plus 1.1%.  The Company’s investments are money market, certificates of deposit, commercial paper, and corporate notes and bonds types of investments that earn interest at prevailing market rates and as such do not have material risk exposure.
 
Based on the Company’s operations, in the opinion of management, the Company is not exposed to material future losses due to market risk.

The Company uses the U.S. dollar as its functional currency in Costa Rica and China.  Accordingly, the Company believes its risk of material loss due to fluctuations in foreign currency markets to be small.
 
28

 

 

 
 
ITEM 8. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA
 
( a) FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

REPORT OF MANAGEMENT

The management of Communications Systems, Inc. and its subsidiary companies is responsible for the integrity and objectivity of the financial statements and other financial information contained in the annual report.  The financial statements and related information were prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America and include amounts that are based on management’s informed judgments and estimates.

In fulfilling its responsibilities for the integrity of financial information, management maintains accounting systems and related controls.  These controls provide reasonable assurance, at appropriate costs, that assets are safeguarded against losses and that financial records are reliable for use in preparing financial statements.  Management recognizes its responsibility for conducting the Company’s affairs according to the highest standards of personal and corporate conduct.

The Audit Committee of the Board of Directors, comprised solely of outside directors, meets with the independent auditors and management periodically to review accounting, auditing, financial reporting and internal control matters.  The independent auditors have free access to this committee, without management present, to discuss the results of their audit work and their opinion on the adequacy of internal financial controls and the quality of financial reporting.
         
/s/ Roger H.D. Lacey 
   
/s/ Edwin C. Freeman
 
Roger H.D. Lacey 
   
Edwin C. Freeman
 
Chief Executive Officer 
   
Chief Financial Officer
 
 
29

 

 

 
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of
Communications Systems, Inc.:
 
We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Communications Systems, Inc., and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, and the related consolidated statements of income (loss) and comprehensive income (loss), changes in stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2014. Our audits also included the financial statement schedule listed in the Index at Item 15. These financial statements and financial statement schedule are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements and financial statement schedule based on our audits.
 
We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
 
In our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Communications Systems, Inc. and subsidiaries at December 31, 2014 and 2013, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2014, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Also, in our opinion, such financial statement schedule, when considered in relation to the basic consolidated financial statements taken as a whole, presents fairly, in all material respects, the information set forth therein.
 
We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2014, based on criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated March 12, 2015 expressed an unqualified opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.
 
/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP
 
Minneapolis, Minnesota
 
March 12, 2015
 
 
30

 

 

 
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
 
To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of
Communications Systems, Inc.:
 
We have audited the internal control over financial reporting of Communications Systems, Inc., and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2014, based on criteria established in Internal Control — Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.
 
We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company’s principal executive and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the company’s board of directors, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of the inherent limitations of internal control over financial reporting, including the possibility of collusion or improper management override of controls, material misstatements due to error or fraud may not be prevented or detected on a timely basis. Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting to future periods are subject to the risk that the controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2014, based on the criteria established in Internal Control — Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.

We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedule as of and for the year ended December 31, 2014, of the Company, and our report dated March 12, 2015, expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements and financial statement schedule.
 
/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP
 
Minneapolis, Minnesota
 
March 12, 2015
 

31

 

 


COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
   
   
December 31
   
December 31
 
   
2014
   
2013
 
ASSETS
           
CURRENT ASSETS:
           
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 13,736,857     $ 20,059,120  
Investments
    4,602,717       5,742,314  
Trade accounts receivable, less allowance for doubtful accounts of $22,000 and $69,000, respectively
    13,839,662       22,902,323  
Inventories
    31,109,653       29,111,656  
Prepaid income taxes
    2,317,688       1,381,502  
Other current assets
    1,050,000       716,784  
Deferred income taxes
    3,249,164       3,758,750  
TOTAL CURRENT ASSETS
    69,905,741       83,672,449  
                 
PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT,  net
    18,153,152       14,941,492  
OTHER ASSETS:
               
Investments
    11,540,261       3,920,978  
Funded pension assets
    172,405       305,028  
Other assets
    514,676       692,794  
TOTAL OTHER ASSETS
    12,227,342       4,918,800  
TOTAL ASSETS
  $ 100,286,235     $ 103,532,741  
                 
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
               
CURRENT LIABILITIES:
               
Current portion of long-term debt
  $ 524,220     $ 489,706  
Accounts payable
    5,180,631       4,894,869  
Accrued compensation and benefits
    3,696,930       3,927,728  
Accrued consideration
          558,801  
Other accrued liabilities
    2,146,582       1,765,428  
Dividends payable
    1,446,498       1,436,318  
TOTAL CURRENT LIABILITIES
    12,994,861       13,072,850  
LONG TERM LIABILITIES:
               
Uncertain tax positions
    77,279       400,846  
Deferred income taxes
    1,089,994       809,179  
Long-term debt - mortgage payable
    103,603       627,823  
TOTAL LONG-TERM LIABILITIES
    1,270,876       1,837,848  
                 
COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES  (Footnote 7)
               
STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
               
Preferred stock, par value $1.00 per share;
3,000,000 shares authorized; none issued
               
Common stock, par value $.05 per share; 30,000,000 shares
               
authorized; 8,654,756 and 8,553,320 shares issued and
               
outstanding, respectively
    432,738       427,666  
Additional paid-in capital
    38,593,230       37,110,671  
Retained earnings
    47,689,688       51,323,718  
Accumulated other comprehensive loss
    (695,158 )     (240,012 )
TOTAL STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
    86,020,498       88,622,043  
                 
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
  $ 100,286,235     $ 103,532,741  
   
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

32

 

 

 
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME (LOSS) AND COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS)
 
   
Year Ended December 31
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
Sales
  $ 119,071,439     $ 131,319,510     $ 104,249,654  
Costs and expenses:
                       
Cost of sales
    76,912,881       86,420,982       62,752,763  
Selling, general and administrative expenses
    38,627,801       36,742,869       38,100,773  
Impairment loss
          5,849,853        
Restructuring expense
    237,838       1,149,439        
Total costs and expenses
    115,778,520       130,163,143       100,853,536  
Operating income
    3,292,919       1,156,367       3,396,118  
Other income and (expenses):
                       
Investment and other income
    80,392       125,985       75,187  
(Loss)/gain on sale of assets
    (112,242 )     (73,126 )     62,630  
Interest and other expense
    (79,841 )     (106,101 )     (136,255 )
Other (expense) income,  net
    (111,691 )     (53,242 )     1,562  
Income from operations before income taxes
    3,181,228       1,103,125       3,397,680  
Income tax expense
    1,219,355       2,061,013       1,159,566  
Net income (loss)
    1,961,873       (957,888 )     2,238,114  
Other comprehensive (loss) income, net of tax:
                       
Additional minimum pension liability adjustments
    155,000       37,000       1,311,000  
Unrealized (losses)/gains on available-for-sale securities
    (42,666 )     (21,964 )     26,223  
Foreign currency translation adjustment
    (567,480 )     333,000       (2,032,877 )
Total other comprehensive (loss) income
    (455,146 )     348,036       (695,654 )
Comprehensive income (loss)
  $ 1,506,727     $ (609,852 )   $ 1,542,460  
                         
Basic net income (loss) per share:
  $ 0.23     $ (.11 )   $ .26  
Diluted net income (loss) per share:
  $ 0.23     $ (.11 )   $ .26  
Weighted Average Basic Shares Outstanding
    8,622,032       8,531,073       8,508,497  
Weighted Average Dilutive Shares Outstanding
    8,640,416       8,531,073       8,518,613  
   
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.
 

33

 

 


COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
   
                           
Accumulated
       
               
Additional
         
Other
       
   
Common Stock
   
Paid-in
   
Retained
   
Comprehensive
       
   
Shares
   
Amount
   
Capital
   
Earnings
   
Income (Loss)
   
Total
 
BALANCE AT DECEMBER 31, 2011
    8,466,774     $ 423,339     $ 35,533,273     $ 61,466,342     $ 107,606     $ 97,530,560  
Net income
                            2,238,114               2,238,114  
Issuance of common stock under Employee Stock Purchase Plan
    13,849       692       171,078                       171,770  
Issuance of common stock to Employee Stock Ownership Plan
    36,145       1,807       506,391                       508,198  
Issuance of common stock under Employee Stock Option Plan
    12,000       600       84,983                       85,583  
Issuance of common stock under Executive Stock Plan
    16,156       808       39,503                       40,311  
Tax benefit from non-qualified employee stock options
                    67,835                       67,835  
Share based compensation
                    302,964                       302,964  
Purchase of common stock
    (70,028 )     (3,501 )     (301,509 )     (452,941 )             (757,951 )
Shareholder dividends ($0.64 per share)
                            (5,496,336 )             (5,496,336 )
Other comprehensive loss
                                    (695,654 )     (695,654 )
BALANCE AT DECEMBER 31, 2012
    8,474,896       423,745       36,404,518       57,755,178       (588,048 )     93,995,393  
                                                 
Net loss
                            (957,888 )             (957,888 )
Issuance of common stock under Employee Stock Purchase Plan
    16,977       849       172,354                       173,203  
Issuance of common stock to Employee Stock Ownership Plan
    44,598       2,230       461,589                       463,819  
Issuance of common stock under Non-Employee Stock Option Plan
    15,000       750       109,500                       110,250  
Issuance of common stock under Executive Stock Plan
    1,849       92       27,312                       27,404  
Tax benefit from non-qualified stock options
                    16,284                       16,284  
Share based compensation
                    (80,886 )                     (80,886 )
Shareholder dividends ($0.64 per share)
                            (5,473,572 )             (5,473,572 )
Other comprehensive income
                                    348,036       348,036  
BALANCE AT DECEMBER 31, 2013
    8,553,320       427,666       37,110,671       51,323,718       (240,012 )     88,622,043  
                                                 
Net income
                            1,961,873               1,961,873  
Issuance of common stock under Employee Stock Purchase Plan
    14,104       705       166,637                       167,342  
Issuance of common stock to Employee Stock Ownership Plan
    32,520       1,626       360,647                       362,273  
Issuance of common stock under Non-Employee Stock Option Plan
    12,000       600       98,760                       99,360  
Issuance of common stock under Executive Stock Plan
    44,769       2,239       0                       2,239  
Tax benefit from non-qualified stock options
                    80,402                       80,402  
Share based compensation
                    784,785                       784,785  
Other share retirements
    (1,957 )     (98 )     (8,672 )     (14,052 )             (22,822 )
Shareholder dividends ($0.64 per share)
                            (5,581,851 )             (5,581,851 )
Other comprehensive loss
                                    (455,146 )     (455,146 )
BALANCE AT DECEMBER 31, 2014
    8,654,756       432,738       38,593,230       47,689,688       (695,158 )     86,020,498  
   
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.
 

34

 

 

 
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
 
   
Year Ended December 31
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES:
                 
Net income (loss)
  $ 1,961,873     $ (957,888 )   $ 2,238,114  
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
                       
Depreciation and amortization
    2,482,300       2,184,830       2,133,511  
Share based compensation
    784,785       (80,886 )     302,964  
Deferred taxes
    790,402       (317,727 )     (631,626 )
Impairment loss
          5,849,853        
Change in fair value of acquisition-related contingent consideration
          (43,898 )     85,501  
Loss/(gain) on sale of assets
    112,242       73,126       (62,630 )
Excess tax benefit from share based payments
    (80,402 )     (16,284 )     (67,835 )
Changes in assets and liabilities:
                       
Trade receivables
    9,057,078       (8,207,253 )     (189,775 )
Inventories
    (2,039,599 )     4,647,916       (7,705,772 )
Prepaid income taxes
    (936,186 )     732,618       1,776,601  
Other assets
    (282,456 )     89,533       252,378  
Accounts payable
    105,602       (4,342,626 )     4,819,481  
Accrued compensation and benefits
    139,698       994,012       (2,250,647 )
Other accrued liabilities
    405,424       71,293       (680,171 )
Income taxes payable
    (243,165 )     96,704       (15,168 )
Other
    (85,519 )           195,244  
Net cash provided by operating activities
    12,172,077       773,323       200,170  
                         
CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES:
                       
Capital expenditures
    (5,577,039 )     (2,699,347 )     (2,607,958 )
Purchases of investments
    (12,682,351 )     (4,401,321 )     (15,010,778 )
Proceeds from the sale of fixed assets
    51,073       82,078       198,109  
Proceeds from the sale of investments
    6,160,000       12,794,000       20,456,039  
Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities
    (12,048,317 )     5,775,410       3,035,412  
                         
CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES:
                       
Cash dividends paid
    (5,571,672 )     (4,099,087 )     (6,734,466 )
Mortgage principal payments
    (489,706 )     (457,464 )     (427,345 )
Proceeds from issuance of common stock, net of shares withheld
    246,119       310,857       297,664  
Excess tax benefit from stock based payments
    80,402       16,284       67,835  
Payment of contingent consideration related to acquisition
    (565,647 )     (161,060 )     (370,096 )
Purchase of common stock
                (757,951 )
Net cash used in financing activities
    (6,300,504 )     (4,390,470 )     (7,924,359 )
                         
EFFECT OF FOREIGN EXCHANGE RATE CHANGES ON CASH
    (145,519 )     31,145       42,779  
                         
NET (DECREASE) INCREASE IN CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
    (6,322,263 )     2,189,408       (4,645,998 )
                         
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS AT BEGINNING OF YEAR
    20,059,120       17,869,712       22,515,710  
                         
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS AT END OF YEAR
  $ 13,736,857     $ 20,059,120     $ 17,869,712  
                         
SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURES OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION:
                       
Income taxes paid
  $ 1,591,257     $ 1,556,590     $ 87,343  
Interest paid
    73,860       106,101       138,477  
Dividends declared not paid
    1,446,498       1,436,318        
Capital expenditures in accounts payable
    188,564              
   
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.
 
 
35

 

 

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Years Ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012

NOTE 1 - SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

Description of business: Communications Systems, Inc. (herein collectively called “CSI,” “our” or the “Company”) is a Minnesota corporation organized in 1969 that operates directly and through its subsidiaries located in the United States, Costa Rica, and the United Kingdom. CSI is principally engaged through its Suttle business unit in the manufacture and sale of modular connecting and wiring devices for voice and data communications, digital subscriber line filters, and structured wiring systems and through its Transition Networks business unit in the manufacture of media and rate conversion products for telecommunications networks. CSI also provides through its JDL Technologies business unit IT solutions including network design, computer infrastructure installations, IT service management, change management, network security and network operations services.

The Company classifies its businesses into three segments: Suttle , which manufactures U.S. standard modular connecting and wiring devices for voice and data communications; Transition Networks, which designs and markets media conversion products, ethernet switches, and other connectivity and data transmission products; and JDL Technologies, (JDL ), which provides IT services. Effective January 1, 2014, the Company realigned the financial reporting for its business units.  As a result of this realignment, all corporate general and administrative expenses that were previously categorized as “Other” are now included within the three business units as fully allocated costs. There are no material intersegment revenues.

Principles of consolidation: The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and its subsidiaries.  All material intercompany transactions and accounts have been eliminated.

Use of estimates: The presentation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. The Company uses estimates based on the best information available in recording transactions and balances resulting from operations.  Actual results could differ from those estimates.  The Company’s estimates consist principally of reserves for doubtful accounts, sales returns, warranty costs, asset impairment evaluations, accruals for compensation plans, self-insured medical and dental accruals, pension liabilities, lower of cost or market inventory adjustments, provisions for income taxes and deferred taxes and depreciable lives of fixed assets.
 
Cash equivalents: For purposes of the consolidated statements of cash flows, the Company considers all highly liquid investments with a maturity of three months or less at the time of purchase to be cash equivalents. As of December 31, 2014, the Company had $13,737,000 in cash and cash equivalents. Of this amount, $1,073,000 was invested in short-term money market funds that are not considered to be bank deposits and are not insured or guaranteed by the federal deposit insurance company (FDIC) or other government agency. These money market funds seek to preserve the value of the investment at $1.00 per share; however, it is possible to lose money investing in these funds. The remainder is operating cash and certificates of deposit which are fully insured through the FDIC.

Investments: Investments consist of certificates of deposit, commercial paper, and corporate notes and bonds that are traded on the open market and are classified as available-for-sale at December 31, 2014. Available-for-sale investments are reported at fair value with unrealized gains and losses excluded from operations and reported as a separate component of stockholders’ equity, net of tax (see Accumulated other comprehensive loss below).

Inventories: Inventories are stated at the lower of cost or market. Cost is determined by the first-in, first-out method. Provision to reduce inventories to the lower of cost or market is made based on a review of excess and obsolete inventories, estimates of future sales, examination of historical consumption rates and the related value of component parts.

Property, plant and equipment: Property, plant and equipment are recorded at cost.  Depreciation is computed using the straight-line method.  Depreciation included in cost of sales and selling, general and administrative expenses for continuing operations was $2,375,000, $2,030,000 and $2,058,000 for 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.  Maintenance and repairs are charged to operations and additions or improvements are capitalized.  Items of property sold, retired or otherwise disposed of are removed from the asset and accumulated depreciation accounts and any gains or losses on disposal are reflected in operations.
 
36

 

 

 
Intangible Assets: Intangible assets with indefinite useful lives are not amortized, but are tested at least annually for impairment.

Recoverability of long-lived assets: The Company reviews its long-lived assets periodically when impairment indicators exist as required under generally accepted accounting principles. Potential impairment is determined by comparing the carrying value of the assets with expected net cash flows expected to be provided by operating activities of the business or related products.  If the sum of the expected future net cash flows is less than the carrying value, an impairment loss would be measured by comparing the amount by which the carrying value exceeds the fair value of the asset.

Warranty:   The Company reserves for the estimated cost of product warranties at the time revenue is recognized.  We estimate the costs of our warranty obligations based on our warranty policy or applicable contractual warranty, historical experience of known product failure rates, and use of materials and service delivery costs incurred in correcting product failures.  Management reviews the estimated warranty liability on a quarterly basis to determine its adequacy.

The following table presents the changes in the Company’s warranty liability for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, which relate to normal product warranties and a five-year obligation to provide for potential future liabilities for certain network equipment sales:
             
   
Year Ended December 31
 
   
2014
   
2013
 
Beginning balance
  $ 564,000     $ 590,000  
Amounts charged to expense
    (14,000 )     237,000  
Actual warranty costs paid
    (116,000 )     (263,000 )
Ending balance
  $ 434,000     $ 564,000  
 
Accumulated other comprehensive loss: The components of accumulated other comprehensive loss are as follows:
             
    December 31  
   
2014
   
2013
 
Minimum pension liability
  $ 1,951,000     $ 1,796,000  
Unrealized (loss) gain on available-for-sale investments
    (41,000 )     2,000  
Foreign currency translation
    (2,605,000 )     (2,038,000 )
    $ (695,000 )   $ (240,000 )
 
The functional currency of Austin Taylor and Patapsco is the British pound.   Assets and liabilities denominated in this foreign currency were translated into U.S. dollars at year-end exchange rates.  Revenue and expense transactions were translated using average exchange rates.  Suttle Costa Rica and Transition China use the U.S. dollar as their functional currency.

Revenue recognition : The Company’s manufacturing operations (Suttle and Transition Networks) recognize revenue when the earnings process is complete, evidenced by persuasive evidence of an agreement, delivery has occurred or services have been rendered, the price is fixed or determinable, and collectability is reasonably assured.  Revenue is recognized for domestic and international sales at the shipping point or delivery to customers, based on the related shipping terms. Risk of loss transfers at the point of shipment or delivery to customers, and the Company has no further obligation after such time. Sales are made directly to customers and through distributors. Payment terms for distributors are consistent with the terms of the Company’s direct customers. The Company records a provision for sales returns, sales incentives and warranty costs at the time of the sale based on historical experience and current trends.

JDL generally records revenue on hardware, software and related equipment sales and installation contracts when the revenue recognition criteria are met and products are installed and accepted by the customer.  JDL records revenue on service contracts on a straight-line basis over the contract period, unless evidence suggests the revenue is earned in a different pattern. Each contract is individually reviewed to determine when the earnings process is complete.
 
37

 

 

 
Research and development: Research and development costs consist of outside testing services, equipment and supplies associated with enhancing existing products and developing new products.  Research and development costs are expensed when incurred and totaled $7,835,000 in 2014, $2,760,000 in 2013 and $2,304,000 in 2012.

Net income per share: Basic net income per common share is based on the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during each year. Diluted net income per common share adjusts for the dilutive effect of potential common shares outstanding.  The Company’s only potential common shares outstanding are stock options and unvested shares, which resulted in a dilutive effect of 18,384 shares, 0 shares and 10,116 shares in 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.  The Company calculates the dilutive effect of outstanding options and unvested shares using the treasury stock method. The number of shares not included in the computation of diluted earnings per share because the options’ exercise price was greater than the average market price of common stock during the year for 2014, 2013, and 2012 was 243,427, 0 and 80,290, respectively. Due to the net loss in 2013, there was no dilutive impact from outstanding stock options or unvested shares.

Share based compensation: The Company accounts for share based compensation awards on a fair value basis. The estimated grant date fair value of each stock-based award is recognized in income over the requisite service period (generally the vesting period). The estimated fair value of each option is calculated using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model.

Accounting standards issued:
In May 2014, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued a new accounting standard update on revenue recognition from contracts with customers. The new guidance will replace all current U.S. GAAP guidance on this topic and eliminate all industry-specific guidance. According to the new guidance, revenue is recognized when promised goods or services are transferred to customers in an amount that reflects the consideration the Company expects to receive in exchange for those goods or services. This guidance will be effective for the Company beginning January 1, 2017 and can be applied either retrospectively to each period presented or as a cumulative-effect adjustment as of the date of adoption. Early adoption is not permitted. The Company has not yet selected a transition method and is evaluating the impact of adopting this new accounting standard update on the financial statements and related disclosures.

In January 2015, the FASB issued guidance that eliminates from GAAP the concept of an extraordinary item. As a result, an entity will no longer (1) segregate an extraordinary item from the results of ordinary operations; (2) separately present an extraordinary item on its income statement, net of tax, after income from continuing operations; and (3) disclose income taxes and earnings-per-share data applicable to an extraordinary item. The new guidance will be effective for us in our first quarter of 2016 and early adoption is permitted. We do not expect the adoption of this standard to have a material effect on our reporting and disclosure.

Accounting standards adopted:
There have been no new accounting pronouncements or changes in accounting pronouncements adopted during the period that are of significance or potential significance to the Company.

NOTE 2 –CASH EQUIVALENTS AND INVESTMENTS

The following tables show the Company’s cash equivalents and available-for-sale securities’ amortized cost, gross unrealized gains, gross unrealized losses and fair value by significant investment category recorded as cash equivalents or short and long term investments as of December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013:
                                           
December 31, 2014
 
 
   
Amortized Cost
   
Gross Unrealized Gains
   
Gross Unrealized Losses
   
Fair Value
   
Cash Equivalents
   
Short-Term Investments
   
Long-Term Investments
 
                                           
Cash equivalents:
                                         
Money Market funds
  $ 1,073,000     $     $     $ 1,073,000     $ 1,073,000     $       $    
Subtotal
    1,073,000                   1,073,000       1,073,000              
                                                         
Investments:
                                                       
Certificates of deposit
    7,414,000       1,000       (32,000 )     7,383,000             1,920,000       5,463,000  
Corporate Notes/Bonds
    8,777,000       6,000       (23,000 )     8,760,000             2,683,000       6,077,000  
Subtotal
    16,191,000       7,000       (55,000 )     16,143,000             4,603,000       11,540,000  
                                                         
                                                         
Total
  $ 17,264,000     $ 7,000     $ (55,000 )   $ 17,216,000     $ 1,073,000     $ 4,603,000     $ 11,540,000  
 
38

 

 

 
                                                         
December 31, 2013
 
 
   
Amortized Cost
   
Gross Unrealized Gains
   
Gross Unrealized Losses
   
Fair Value
   
Cash Equivalents
   
Short-Term Investments
   
Long-Term Investments
 
                                                         
Cash equivalents:
                                                       
Money Market funds
  $ 5,752,000     $     $     $ 5,752,000     $ 5,752,000     $       $    
Subtotal
    5,752,000                   5,752,000       5,752,000              
                                                         
Investments:
                                                       
Certificates of deposit
    4,024,000       1,000       (5,000 )     4,020,000       240,000       2,583,000       1,197,000  
Corporate Notes/Bonds
    5,861,000       23,000       (1,000 )     5,883,000             3,159,000       2,724,000  
Subtotal
    9,885,000       24,000       (6,000 )     9,903,000       240,000       5,742,000       3,921,000  
                                                         
Total
  $ 15,637,000     $ 24,000     $ (6,000 )   $ 15,655,000     $ 5,992,000     $ 5,742,000     $ 3,921,000  
 
The Company tests for other than temporary losses on a quarterly basis and has considered the unrealized losses indicated above to be temporary in nature. The Company intends to hold the investments until it can recover the full principal amount and has the ability to do so based on other sources of liquidity. The Company expects such recoveries to occur prior to the contractual maturities.  All unrealized losses as of December 31, 2014 were in a continuous unrealized loss position for less than twelve months and are not deemed to be other than temporarily impaired as of December 31, 2014.
 
The following table summarizes the estimated fair value of our investments, designated as available-for-sale and classified by the contractual maturity date of the securities as of December 31, 2014:
             
   
Amortized Cost
   
Estimated Market Value
 
             
Due within one year
  $ 4,598,000     $ 4,603,000  
Due after one year through five years
    11,593,000       11,540,000  
    $ 16,191,000     $ 16,143,000  

The Company did not recognize any gross realized gains and gross realized losses were immaterial during the years ending December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. If the Company had realized gains or losses, they would be included within investment and other income in the accompanying consolidated statements of income.

NOTE 3 - INVENTORIES

Inventories consist of:
           
   
December 31
 
   
2014
   
2013
 
Finished goods
  $ 19,208,000     $ 18,734,000  
Raw and processed materials
    11,902,000       10,378,000  
    $ 31,110,000     $ 29,112,000  
 
39

 

 

 
NOTE 4 - PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Property, plant and equipment and the estimated useful lives are as follows:
               
 
Estimated
 
December 31
 
 
useful life
 
2014
   
2013
 
Land
    $ 3,107,000     $ 3,116,000  
Buildings and improvements
7-40 years
    8,523,000       8,528,000  
Machinery and equipment
3-15 years
    28,728,000       25,408,000  
Furniture and fixtures
5-10 years
    3,490,000       4,042,000  
Construction in progress
      1,925,000       617,000  
        45,773,000       41,711,000  
Less accumulated depreciation
      (27,620,000 )     (26,770,000 )
      $ 18,153,000     $ 14,941,000  
 
NOTE 5 –INTANGIBLE ASSETS
 
The Company’s identifiable intangible assets with finite lives are being amortized over their estimated useful lives and are included within other assets in the consolidated balance sheets and were as follows:
                         
   
December 31, 2014
 
   
Gross Carrying Amount
   
Accumulated Amortization
   
Foreign Currency
Translation
   
Net
 
                         
Trademarks
    91,000       (38,000 )     (4,000 )     49,000  
Customer relationships
    491,000       (159,000 )     (26,000 )     306,000  
Technology
    229,000       (149,000 )     (11,000 )     69,000  
      811,000       (346,000 )     (41,000 )     424,000  
                                 
   
December 31, 2013
 
   
Gross Carrying Amount
   
Accumulated Amortization
   
Foreign Currency
Translation
   
Net
 
                                 
Trademarks
    82,000       (17,000 )     (11,000 )     54,000  
Customer relationships
    491,000       (73,000 )     (43,000 )     375,000  
Technology
    229,000       (68,000 )     (42,000 )     119,000  
      802,000       (158,000 )     (96,000 )     548,000  

Amortization expense on these identifiable intangible assets was $107,000, $102,000, and $103,000 in 2014, 2013 and 2012 respectively. The amortization expense is included in selling, general and administrative expenses. The estimated future amortization expense for identifiable intangible assets during the next five fiscal years is as follows:
       
Year Ending December 31:
     
2015
  $ 101,000  
2016
    83,000  
2017
    58,000  
2018
    53,000  
2019
    47,000  
 
40

 

 

 
NOTE 6 - EMPLOYEE RETIREMENT BENEFITS

The Company has an Employee Savings Plan (401(k)) and matches a percentage of employee contributions up to six percent of compensation.  Contributions to the plan in 2014, 2013 and 2012 were $528,000, $457,000, and $471,000, respectively.

The Company’s U.K.-based subsidiary Austin Taylor maintains defined benefit pension plans that cover two active employees.  The Company does not provide any other post-retirement benefits to its employees.  The following table summarizes the balance sheet impact, including benefit obligations, assets and funded status of Austin Taylor’s pension plans at December 31, 2014 and 2013:
             
   
2014
   
2013
 
Change in benefit obligation:
           
Benefit obligation at the beginning of the year
  $ 3,340,000     $ 5,675,000  
Service cost
    8,000       5,000  
Interest cost
    143,000       186,000  
Augmentations
          211,000  
Actuarial losses/(gains)
    363,000       (198,000 )
Benefits paid
    (78,000 )     (293,000 )
Changes due to plan settlement
          (2,363,000 )
Foreign currency (losses)/gains
    (192,000 )     117,000  
Benefit obligation at the end of the year
    3,584,000       3,340,000  
                 
Change in plan assets:
               
Fair value of plan assets at beginning of year
    3,645,000       5,547,000  
Actual return on plan assets
    340,000       343,000  
Employer contributions
    59,000       297,000  
Benefits paid
    (78,000 )     (293,000 )
Changes due to plan settlement
          (2,363,000 )
Foreign currency (gains)/losses
    (210,000 )     114,000  
Fair value of plan assets at end of year
    3,756,000       3,645,000  
                 
Funded status at end of year – net asset
  $ 172,000     $ 305,000  
 
Weighted average assumptions used to determine net periodic pension costs:
             
Discount rate
    3.6 %     4.6 %
Expected return on assets
    3.6 %     5.5 %

The plans are funded through equities and bonds recorded in the financial statements at fair value. The related amounts for each of these investments were $3,756,000 and $3,645,000 as of December 31, 2014 and 2013 and were determined to be level 2 investments, respectively. Level 2 investments are valued based on observable inputs such as quoted prices for similar instruments and quoted prices in markets that are not active.

The Company does not expect any plan assets to be returned to the Company during the twelve months subsequent to December 31, 2014.

The Company expects to make contributions of $76,000 to the plan in 2015.
 
41

 

 

 
The Company estimates its future pension benefit payments will be as follows:
       
2015
  $ 268,000  
2016
    97,000  
2017
    165,000  
2018
    148,000  
2019
    136,000  
2020 thru 2024
    801,000  

Components of the Company’s net periodic pension (benefit) cost are:
                   
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
Service cost
  $ 8,000     $ 5,000     $ 275,000  
Interest cost
    143,000       186,000       244,000  
Expected return on assets
    (188,000 )     (229,000 )     (262,000 )
Amortization of prior service cost
          211,000        
Net periodic pension (benefit) cost
  $ (37,000 )   $ 173,000     $ 257,000  
 
NOTE 7 – COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

Operating leases:   The Company leases land, buildings and equipment under operating leases with original terms from 1 to 5 years.  Total rent expense was $546,000, $409,000 and $443,000 in 2014, 2013 and 2012 respectively.   At December 31, 2014, the Company was obligated under noncancelable operating leases to make minimum annual future lease payments as follows:
       
Year Ending December 31:
     
2015
  $ 290,000  
2016
    86,000  
    $ 376,000  

Long-term debt:   The mortgage on the Company’s headquarters building is payable in monthly installments and carries an interest rate of 6.83%.  The mortgage matures on March 1, 2016.  The outstanding balance on the mortgage was $628,000 at December 31, 2014. The mortgage is secured by the building.

The annual requirements for principal payments on the mortgage are as follows:
       
2015
    524,000  
2016
    104,000  

Line of credit:   The Company has a $10,000,000 line of credit from Wells Fargo Bank.  The Company had no outstanding borrowings against the line of credit at December 31, 2014 and 2013 and the entire credit line is available for use.  Interest on borrowings on the credit line is at LIBOR plus 1.1% (1.4% at December 31, 2014). The credit agreement expires October 31, 2016 and is secured by assets of the Company.  Our credit agreement contains financial covenants including current ratio, net income, and tangible net worth minimums.  The Company was in compliance with all financial covenants as of December 31, 2014.

As of December 31, 2014, the Company had no other material commitments (either cancelable or non-cancelable) for capital expenditures or other purchase commitments related to ongoing operations.

Long-term compensation plans:   The Company has a long term incentive plan.  The plan provides long-term competitive compensation to enable the Company to attract and retain qualified executive talent and to reward employees for achieving goals and improving company performance. The plan provides grants of “performance units” made at the beginning of performance periods and paid at the end of the period if performance goals are met. Awards were previously made every other year and are paid following the end of the cycle with annual vesting.  Payment in the case of retirement, disability or death will be on a pro rata basis.  The Company recognized (income)/expense of $0, $ (124,000) and $ (16,000) in 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.  Accrual balances for long-term compensation plans at December 31, 2014 and 2013 were $0 and $199,000, respectively. Awards paid were $199,000 in 2014, $27,000 in 2013 and $1,657,000 in 2012.  Awards for the 2012 to 2014 cycles will be paid out 25% in cash and 75% in stock and awards for the 2013 to 2015 cycles will be paid out 100% in stock.  Starting in 2014, all long term compensation is awarded in stock. The stock portion of these awards are treated as equity plans and included within the Stock Compensation footnote within the Deferred Stock Outstanding section below.
 
42

 

 

 
Other contingencies:   In the ordinary course of business, the Company is exposed to legal actions and claims and incurs costs to defend against such actions and claims.  Company management is not aware of any outstanding or pending legal actions or claims that would materially affect the Company’s financial position, results of operations, or cash flows.

NOTE 8 – STOCK COMPENSATION

2011 Executive Incentive Compensation Plan

On March 28, 2011 the Board adopted and on May 19, 2011 the Company’s shareholders approved the Company’s 2011 Executive Incentive Compensation Plan (“2011 Incentive Plan”).  The 2011 Incentive Plan authorizes incentive awards to officers, key employees and non-employee directors in the form of options (incentive and non-qualified), stock appreciation rights, restricted stock, restricted stock units, performance stock units (“deferred stock”), performance cash units, and other awards in stock, cash, or a combination of stock and cash.  Up to 1,000,000 shares of our Common Stock may be issued pursuant to awards under the 2011 Incentive Plan.

During 2014, stock options covering 317,722 shares were awarded to key executive employees and non-employee directors, which options expire seven years from the date of award and vest 25% each year beginning one year after the date of award.  The Company also granted deferred stock awards of 43,824 shares to key employees during 2014 under the Company’s long-term incentive plan that vest over three years with the first vesting period at March 28, 2015.

At December 31, 2014, 321,928 shares remained available for future issuance under the 2011 Incentive Plan.

Stock Option Plan for Directors

Shares of common stock are reserved for issuance to non-employee directors under options granted by the Company prior to 2011 under its Stock Option Plan for Non-Employee Directors (the “Director Plan”).  Under the Director Plan nonqualified stock options to acquire 3,000 shares of common stock were automatically granted to each non-employee director concurrent with annual meetings of shareholders in 2010 and earlier years and vested immediately. The exercise price of options granted was the fair market value of the common stock on the date of the respective shareholder meetings.  Options granted under the Director Plan expire 10 years from date of grant.

The Director Plan was suspended as of May 19, 2011 to prohibit automatic option grants in 2011 in connection with seeking and receiving shareholder approval of the 2011 Incentive Plan, at the 2011 Annual Meeting of Shareholders. As shareholder approval was received, the Board amended the Director Plan to prohibit any future option awards under that plan on August 11, 2011. No stock options were granted to non-employee directors in 2014, 2013 and 2012.

Stock Plan

Under the Company’s 1992 Stock Plan (“the Stock Plan”), shares of common stock may be issued pursuant to stock options, restricted stock or deferred stock grants to officers and key employees. Exercise prices of stock options under the Stock Plan cannot be less than fair market value of the stock on the date of grant. Rules and conditions governing awards of stock options, restricted stock and deferred stock are determined by the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors, subject to certain limitations in the Stock Plan. When seeking approval of the 2011 Incentive Plan at the 2011 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, the Company committed to amending the Stock Plan to prohibit the issuance of future equity awards if such approval was given. Effective August 11, 2011, the amendment to prohibit future stock options or other equity awards was approved by the Board.

At December 31, 2014 after reserving for stock options and deferred stock awards described in the two preceding paragraphs and adjusting for forfeitures and issuances during the year, there were 22,008 shares reserved for issuance under the Stock Plan. The Company did not award stock options or deferred stock under this plan in 2014.
 
43

 

 

 
Stock Options Outstanding

The following table summarizes changes in the number of outstanding stock options under the Director Plan and Stock Plan during the three years ended December 31, 2014.
                 
         
Weighted average
 
Weighted average
 
         
exercise price
 
remaining
 
   
Options
   
per share
 
contractual term
 
Outstanding – December 31, 2011
    236,820     $ 11.35  
5.18 years
 
Awarded
    92,223       13.10      
Exercised
    (12,000 )     7.13      
Forfeited
    (5,890 )     10.58      
Outstanding – December 31, 2012
    311,153     $ 12.05  
4.99 years
 
Awarded
    169,550       10.19      
Exercised
    (15,000 )     7.35      
Forfeited
    (156,264 )     11.25      
Outstanding – December 31, 2013
    309,439     $ 11.66  
4.13 years
 
Awarded
    317,722       12.30      
Exercised
    (12,000 )     8.28      
Forfeited
    (74,757 )     13.20      
Outstanding – December 31, 2014
    540,404       11.90  
5.13 years
 
                     
Excercisable at December 31, 2014
    182,638     $ 11.40  
3.17 years
 
Expected to vest December 31, 2014
    540,404       11.90  
5.13 years
 

The fair value of awards issued under the Company’s stock option plan is estimated at grant date using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model.  The following table displays the assumptions used in the model.
                   
   
Year Ended December 31
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
Expected volatility
    31.4 %     31.8 %     31.2 %
Risk free interest rate
    2.7 %     2.1 %     2.3 %
Expected holding period
 
6 years
   
6 years
   
6 years
 
Dividend yield
    5.2 %     6.3 %     4.6 %

Total unrecognized compensation expense was $423,000 as of December 31, 2014, which is expected to be recognized over the next 2.6 years.  The aggregate intrinsic value of all outstanding options, exercisable options, and options expected to vest ( the amount by which the market price of the stock on the last day of the period exceeded the market price of the stock on the date of grant)   was $56,000 based on the Company’s stock price at December 31, 2014.  The intrinsic value of options exercised during the year was $40,000, $38,000 and $59,000 in 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.  Net cash proceeds from the exercise of all stock options were $99,000, $110,000 and $86,000 for 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.  The following table summarizes the status of stock options outstanding at December 31, 2014:
               
       
Weighted Average
 
Weighted
 
       
Remaining
 
Average
 
Range of Exercise Prices
 
Shares
 
Option Life
 
Exercise Price
 
$8.65 to $9.99
    30,000  
3.2 years
    9.68  
$10.00 to $12.00
    294,225  
5.3 years
    11.24  
$12.01 to $14.50
    216,179  
5.2 years
    13.11  

The Company receives an income tax benefit related to the gains received by officers and key employees who make disqualifying dispositions of stock received on exercise of qualified incentive stock options and on non-qualified options.  The amount of tax benefit received by the Company was $14,000, $14,000 and $21,000 in 2014, 2013 and 2012 respectively.  The tax benefit amounts have been credited to additional paid-in capital.
 
44

 

 

Deferred Stock Outstanding

The following table summarizes the changes in the number of deferred stock shares under the Stock Plan and 2011 Incentive Plan over the period December 31, 2011 to December 31, 2014:
             
         
Weighted Average
 
         
Grant Date
 
   
Shares
   
Fair Value
 
Outstanding – December 31, 2011
    71,849     $ 15.14  
Granted
    105,698       13.49  
Vested
           
Forfeited
    (16,757 )     13.95  
Outstanding – December 31, 2012
    160,790       14.16  
Granted
    222,654       10.08  
Vested
    (1,849 )     14.82  
Forfeited
    (181,455 )     12.11  
Outstanding – December 31, 2013
    200,140       11.47  
Granted
    48,824       12.52  
Vested
    (16,754 )     13.81  
Forfeited
    (70,896 )     13.02  
Outstanding – December 31, 2014
    161,314       10.87  


The grant date fair value is calculated based on the Company’s closing stock price as of the grant date. As of December 31, 2014, the total unrecognized compensation expense related to the deferred stock shares was $342,000 and is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 2.1 years.

Restricted Stock Units Outstanding

The following table summarizes the changes in the number of restricted stock units under the 2011 Incentive Plan over the period December 31, 2012 to December 31, 2014:
             
         
Weighted Average
 
         
Grant Date
 
   
Shares
   
Fair Value
 
Outstanding – December 31, 2011
        $  
Granted
    25,879       10.82  
Vested
           
Forfeited
           
Outstanding – December 31, 2012
    25,879       10.82  
Granted
    31,354       10.05  
Vested
           
Forfeited
    (4,040 )     9.90  
Outstanding – December 31, 2013
    53,193       10.44  
Granted
    13,973       11.98  
Vested
    (28,015 )     10.89  
Forfeited
           
Outstanding – December 31, 2014
    39,151       10.67  

The grant date fair value is calculated based on the Company’s closing stock price as of the grant date. As of December 31, 2014, the total unrecognized compensation expense related to the restricted stock units was $61,000 and is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 0.4 years.

Compensation Expense

Share-based compensation expense is recognized based on the fair value of awards granted over the vesting period of the award.  Share-based compensation expense/(income) recognized for 2014, 2013 and 2012 was $785,000, $ (81,000) and $303,000 before income taxes and $510,000, $ (53,000) and $197,000 after income taxes, respectively. Share-based compensation expense is recorded as a part of selling, general and administrative expenses.
 
45

 

 

 
Employee Stock Purchase Plan

Under the Company’s Employee Stock Purchase Plan (“ESPP”) employees are able to acquire shares of common stock at 90% of the price at the end of each current quarterly plan term.  The most recent term ended December 31, 2014.  The ESPP is considered compensatory under current rules.  At December 31, 2014, after giving effect to the shares issued as of that date, 21,483 shares remain available for purchase under the ESPP.

Employee Stock Ownership Plan (ESOP)

All eligible employees of the Company participate in the ESOP after completing one year of service.  Contributions are allocated to each participant based on compensation and vest 30% after three years of service and incrementally thereafter, with full vesting after seven years.  At December 31, 2014, the ESOP held 557,375 shares of the Company’s common stock, all of which have been allocated to the accounts of eligible employees.  Contributions to the plan are determined by the Board of Directors and can be made in cash or shares of the Company’s stock. The 2014 ESOP contribution was $385,424 for which the Company will issue 36,707 shares in March 2015.  The 2013 ESOP contribution was $362,273 for which the Company issued 32,520 shares in 2014.  The Company’s 2012 ESOP contribution was $463,819 for which the Company issued 44,598 shares of common stock to the ESOP in 2013.

NOTE 9 – COMMON STOCK

PURCHASES OF COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC. COMMON STOCK

In October 2008, the Company’s Board of Directors authorized the repurchase of shares of the Company’s stock pursuant to Exchange Act Rule 10b-18 on the open market, in block trades or in private transactions. At December 31, 2014, 411,910 additional shares could be repurchased under outstanding Board authorizations.

SHAREHOLDER RIGHTS PLAN

On December 23, 2009 the Board of Directors adopted a shareholders’ rights plan.  Under this plan, the Board of Directors declared a distribution of one right per share of common stock.  Each right entitles the holder to purchase 1/100 th of a share of a new series of Junior Participating Preferred Stock of the Company at an initial exercise price of $41.  The rights expire on December 23, 2019.  The rights will become exercisable only following the acquisition by a person or group, without the prior consent of the Board of Directors, of 16.5% or more of the Company’s voting stock, or following the announcement of a tender offer or exchange offer to acquire an interest of 16.5% or more.  If the rights become exercisable, each rightholder will be entitled to purchase, at the exercise price, common stock with a market value equal to twice the exercise price.  Should the Company be acquired, each right would entitle the holder to purchase, at the exercise price, common stock of the acquiring company with a market value equal to twice the exercise price.  Any rights owned by the acquiring person or group would become void.

NOTE 10 - INCOME TAXES

Income tax expense from continuing operations consists of the following:
       
   
Year Ended December 31
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
Currently payable income taxes:
                 
Federal
  $ 328,000     $ 2,114,000     $ 1,669,000  
State
    (12,000 )     297,000       141,000  
Foreign
    113,000       (32,000 )     (18,000 )
      429,000       2,379,000     $ 1,792,000  
                         
Deferred income taxes (benefit):
                       
Federal
  $ 761,000     $ (303,000 )   $ (542,000 )
State
    40,000       18,000       (33,000 )
Foreign
    (11,000 )     (33,000 )     (57,000 )
      790,000       (318,000 )     (632,000 )
                         
    $ 1,219,000     $ 2,061,000     $ 1,160,000  
 
46

 

 

 
Austin Taylor Communications, Ltd. operates in the United Kingdom (U.K.) and is subject to U.K. rather than U.S. income taxes.  Austin Taylor had pretax losses of $389,000, $428,000 and $419,000 in 2014, 2013 and 2012 respectively.  At the end of 2014, Austin Taylor’s net operating loss carry-forward was $6,957,000.  The Company remains uncertain that it will be able to generate the future income needed to realize the tax benefit of the carry-forward.  Accordingly, the Company has continued to maintain its deferred tax valuation allowance against the potential carry-forward benefit.

Transition Networks EMEA, Ltd. operates in the U.K. and is subject to U.K. rather than U.S. income taxes. Transition Networks EMEA, Ltd. had pretax losses of $54,000 and $2,754,000 in 2014 and 2013, respectively and pretax income of $316,000 in 2012.  Austin Taylor's net operating loss provided group relief to Transition Networks EMEA, Ltd. during 2012. At the end of 2014, Transition Networks EMEA, Ltd.’s net operating loss carry-forward was $37,000.

In 2007, Transition Networks China began operations in China and is subject to Chinese taxes rather than U.S. income taxes.  Transition Networks China had pretax income of $345,000, $341,000, $36,000 in 2014, 2013, and 2012 respectively.  At the end of 2014, Transition Networks China's net operating loss carry-forward was $460,000.  Due to the history of losses in China the Company remains uncertain that it will be able to generate the future income needed to realize the tax benefit of the carry-forward.  Accordingly, the Company has continued to maintain its deferred tax valuation reserve against the potential carry-forward benefit.

Suttle Costa Rica, S.A. operates in Costa Rica and is subject to Costa Rica income taxes. In 2005, the Board of Directors of Suttle Costa Rica S. A. declared a dividend in the amount of $3,500,000 payable to the Company. The dividend and related “dividend reinvestment plan” qualify under Internal Revenue Code Sec. 965, which allows the Company to receive an 85% dividend-received deduction if the amount of the dividend is reinvested in the United States pursuant to a domestic reinvestment plan.  The Company made the required qualified capital expenditures in 2006.  It is the Company’s intention to maintain the remaining undistributed earnings in its Costa Rica subsidiary to support continued operations there. No deferred taxes have been provided for the undistributed earnings.

Suttle Costa Rica had pretax income of $321,000, $152,000 and $168,000 in 2014, 2013 and 2012 respectively.  At the end of 2012, Suttle Costa Rica’s net operating loss carry-forward was $0.

The provision for income taxes for continuing operations varied from the federal statutory tax rate as follows:
                   
   
Year Ended December 31
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
Tax at U.S. statutory rate
    35.0 %     35.0 %     35.0 %
Surtax exemption
    (0.7 )     (5.4 )     (1.5 )
State income taxes, net of federal benefit
    1.0       19.1       1.7  
Foreign income taxes, net of  foreign tax credits
    7.8       3.3       (0.2 )
Impairment of goodwill
          116.2        
Other nondeductible items
    3.1       4.9        
Effect of (decrease) increase in uncertain tax positions
    (10.2 )     7.3        
Other
    2.3       6.4       (0.9 )
Effective tax rate
    38.3 %     186.8 %     34.1 %

47

 

 


Deferred tax assets and liabilities as of December 31 related to the following:
             
   
2014
   
2013
 
Deferred tax assets:
           
Allowance for doubtful accounts
  $ 4,000     $ 19,000  
Inventory
    2,779,000       3,295,000  
Accrued and prepaid expenses
    594,000       502,000  
Domestic net operating loss carry-forward
          26,000  
Long-term compensation plans
    380,000       373,000  
Nonemployee director stock compensation
    403,000       243,000  
Other stock compensation
    118,000       111,000  
State income taxes
          75,000  
Foreign net operating loss carry-forwards and credits
    1,743,000       1,639,000  
                 
Gross deferred tax assets
    6,021,000       6,283,000  
Valuation allowance
    (1,734,000 )     (1,618,000 )
                 
Net deferred tax assets
    4,287,000       4,665,000  
                 
Deferred tax liabilities
               
Depreciation
    (2,110,000 )     (1,668,000 )
Intangible assets
    (18,000 )     (47,000 )
                 
Gross deferred tax liability
    (2,128,000 )     (1,715,000 )
                 
Total net deferred tax asset
  $ 2,159,000     $ 2,950,000  
 
The Company assesses uncertain tax positions in accordance with ASC 740. Under this method, the Company must recognize the tax benefit from an uncertain tax position only if it is more likely than not that the tax position will be sustained on examination by the taxing authorities, based on the technical merits of the position. The tax benefits recognized in the financial statements from such uncertain tax positions are measured based on the largest benefit that has a greater than fifty percent likelihood of being realized upon ultimate resolution. The Company’s practice is to recognize interest and penalties related to income tax matters in income tax expense.

Changes in the Company’s uncertain tax positions are summarized as follows:
                   
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
Unrcertain tax positions – January 1
  $ 240,000     $ 153,000     $ 234,000  
Gross increases - tax positions in prior period
    0       0       0  
Gross decreases - tax positions in prior period
    (73,000 )     0       0  
Gross increases - current period tax positions
    0       158,000       0  
Settlements
    (85,000 )     (5,000 )     0  
Expiration of statute of limitations
    (7,000 )     (66,000 )     (81,000 )
Uncertain tax positions – December 31, 2014
  $ 75,000     $ 240,000     $ 153,000  

Included in the balance of uncertain tax positions at December 31, 2014 are $76,000 of tax benefits that if recognized would affect the tax rate.  There are no expected significant changes in the Company’s uncertain tax positions in the next twelve months.  The Company’s income tax liability accounts included accruals for interest and penalties of $2,000 at December 31, 2014.  The Company’s 2014 income tax expense decreased by $159,000 due to net decreases for accrued interest and penalties.

The Company’s federal and state tax returns and tax returns it has filed in Costa Rica and the United Kingdom are open for review going back to the 2011 tax year.

NOTE 11- INFORMATION CONCERNING INDUSTRY SEGMENTS AND MAJOR CUSTOMERS

Effective January 1, 2014, the Company realigned the financial reporting for its business units.  As a result of this realignment, all corporate general and administrative expenses that were previously categorized as “Other” are now included within the three business units as fully allocated costs. The Company classifies its businesses into three segments as follows:
 
 
Suttle manufactures and markets copper and fiber connectivity systems, enclosure systems, xDSL filters and splitters, and active technologies for voice, data and video communications;
 
48

 

 

 
 
Transition Networks manufactures media converters, NIDs, NICs, Ethernet switches and other connectivity products that offer the ability to affordably integrate the benefits of fiber optics into any data network; and
 
JDL Technologies provides technology solutions including virtualization, managed services, wired and wireless network design and implementation services, and converged infrastructure configuration and deployment.

Management has chosen to organize the enterprise and disclose reportable segments based on products and services. There are no material intersegment revenues. In order to conform to the 2014 presentation, the Company has reclassified the previously non-allocated corporate expenses within the business segments.

Suttle products are sold principally to U.S. customers.  Suttle operates manufacturing facilities in the U.S. and Costa Rica.  Net long-lived assets held in foreign countries were approximately $2,810,000 and $1,225,000 at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.  Transition Networks manufactures its products in the United States and makes sales in both the U.S. and international markets.   JDL Technologies operates in the U.S. and makes sales in the U.S.   Consolidated sales to U.S. customers were approximately 86%, 87% and 83% of sales from continuing operations in 2014, 2013 and 2012 respectively.  In 2014, sales to one of Suttle’s customers accounted for 33.6% of consolidated sales. In 2013, sales to one of JDL Technologies’ customers accounted for 17.5% of consolidated sales and one of Suttle’s customers accounted for 18.7% of consolidated sales. In 2012, sales to one of Transition Networks’ customers accounted for 10.6% of consolidated sales and one of Suttle’s customers accounted for 16.6% of consolidated sales.

Information concerning the Company’s operations in the various segments for the twelve-month periods ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012 is as follows:
                               
         
Transition
   
JDL
             
   
Suttle
   
Networks
   
Technologies
   
Other
   
Total
 
2014
                             
Sales
  $ 67,330,307     $ 43,173,864     $ 8,567,268     $     $ 119,071,439  
Cost of sales
    46,338,627       23,975,363       6,598,891             76,912,881  
Gross profit
    20,991,680       19,198,501       1,968,377             42,158,558  
Selling, general and  administrative expenses
    14,388,765       21,392,643       2,846,393             38,627,801  
Restructuring expense
          237,838                   237,838  
Operating income (loss)
  $ 6,602,915     $ (2,431,980 )   $ (878,016 )   $     $ 3,292,919  
                                         
Depreciation and amortization
  $ 1,386,523     $ 944,149     $ 151,628     $     $ 2,482,300  
                                         
Capital expenditures
  $ 4,470,636     $ 589,362     $ 42,914     $ 474,127     $ 5,577,039  
                                         
Assets
  $ 38,083,529     $ 26,508,137     $ 3,815,548     $ 31,879,021     $ 100,286,235  
 
         
Transition
   
JDL
             
   
Suttle
   
Networks
   
Technologies
   
Other
   
Total
 
2013
                             
Sales
  $ 54,346,428     $ 43,856,640     $ 33,116,442     $     $ 131,319,510  
Cost of sales
    38,534,823       21,438,115       26,448,044             86,420,982  
Gross profit
    15,811,605       22,418,525       6,668,398             44,898,528  
Selling, general and  administrative expenses
    11,869,268       21,581,156       3,292,445             36,742,869  
Impairment
          5,849,853                   5,849,853  
Restructuring expense
    225,962       778,760       144,717             1,149,439  
Operating income (loss)
  $ 3,716,375     $ (5,791,244 )   $ 3,231,236     $     $ 1,156,367  
                                         
Depreciation and amortization
  $ 1,044,363     $ 969,482     $ 170,985     $     $ 2,184,830  
                                         
Capital expenditures
  $ 1,215,394     $ 919,376     $ 46,014     $ 518,563     $ 2,699,347  
                                         
Assets
  $ 30,636,805     $ 29,440,438     $ 11,350,381     $ 32,105,117     $ 103,532,741  
 
49

 

 

 
                               
         
Transition
   
JDL
             
   
Suttle
   
Networks
   
Technologies
   
Other
   
Total
 
2012
                             
Sales
  $ 45,030,184     $ 53,842,940     $ 5,376,530     $     $ 104,249,654  
Cost of sales
    33,056,579       25,848,307       3,847,877             62,752,763  
Gross profit
    11,973,605       27,994,633       1,528,653             41,496,891  
Selling, general and  administrative expenses
    10,905,357       24,645,048       2,550,368             38,100,773  
Operating income (loss)
  $ 1,068,248     $ 3,349,585     $ (1,021,715 )   $     $ 3,396,118  
                                         
Depreciation and amortization
  $ 1,025,380     $ 981,080     $ 127,051     $     $ 2,133,511  
                                         
Capital expenditures
  $ 1,167,495     $ 412,568     $ 36,891     $ 991,004     $ 2,607,958  
                                         
Assets
  $ 26,148,148     $ 35,851,189     $ 8,385,337     $ 42,149,971     $ 112,534,645  
 
NOTE 12 – FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS
 
Fair value is defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. Assets and liabilities measured at fair value are classified using the following hierarchy, which is based upon the transparency of inputs to the valuation as of the measurement date:
 
Level 1 – Observable inputs that reflect unadjusted quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in active markets that the Company has the ability to access at the measurement date.
 
Level 2 – Observable inputs such as quoted prices for similar instruments and quoted prices in markets that are not active, and inputs that are directly observable or can be corroborated by observable market data. The types of assets and liabilities included in Level 2 are typically either comparable to actively traded securities or contracts, such as treasury securities with pricing interpolated from recent trades of similar securities, or priced with models using highly observable inputs, such as commodity options priced using observable forward prices and volatilities.
 
Level 3 – Significant inputs to pricing that have little or no observability as of the reporting date. The types of assets and liabilities included in Level 3 are those with inputs requiring significant management judgment or estimation, such as the complex and subjective models and forecasts used to determine the fair value of financial instruments.
 
50

 

 

 
Financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value as of December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, are summarized below:
                         
   
December 31, 2014
 
   
Level 1
   
Level 2
   
Level 3
   
Total Fair Value
 
                         
Cash equivalents:
                       
Money Market funds
  $ 1,073,000     $     $     $ 1,073,000  
Subtotal
    1,073,000                   1,073,000  
                                 
Short-term investments:
                               
Certificates of deposit
          1,920,000             1,920,000  
Corporate Notes/Bonds
          2,683,000             2,683,000  
Subtotal
          4,603,000             4,603,000  
                                 
Long-term investments:
                               
Certificates of deposit
          5,463,000             5,463,000  
Corporate Notes/Bonds
          6,077,000             6,077,000  
Subtotal
          11,540,000             11,540,000  
                                 
Current Liabilities:
                             
Accrued Consideration
                       
Subtotal
                       
                                 
Total
  $ 1,073,000     $ 16,143,000     $     $ 17,216,000  
 
   
December 31, 2013
 
   
Level 1
   
Level 2
   
Level 3
   
Total Fair Value
 
Cash equivalents:
                       
Money Market funds
  $ 5,752,000     $     $     $ 5,752,000  
Certificates of deposit
            240,000               240,000  
Subtotal
    5,752,000       240,000             5,992,000  
                                 
Short-term investments:
                               
Certificates of deposit
          2,583,000             2,583,000  
Corporate Notes/Bonds
            3,159,000               3,159,000  
Subtotal
          5,742,000             5,742,000  
                                 
Long-term investments:
                               
Certificates of deposit
          1,197,000             1,197,000  
Corporate Notes/Bonds
            2,724,000               2,724,000  
Subtotal
          3,921,000             3,921,000  
                                 
Current Liabilities:
                               
Accrued Consideration
                (559,000 )     (559,000 )
Subtotal
                (559,000 )     (559,000 )
                                 
Total
  $ 5,752,000     $ 9,903,000     $ (559,000 )   $ 15,096,000  
 
The estimated fair value of remaining contingent consideration as of December 31, 2013 was $558,801, as noted above. The estimated fair value is considered a level 3 measurement because the probability weighted discounted cash flow methodology used to estimate fair value includes the use of significant unobservable inputs, primarily the contractual contingent consideration gross margin targets and assumed probabilities. The change in the estimated contingent consideration during 2014 was due to $566,000 in payments and $7,000 in foreign currency gains.
 
We record transfers between levels of the fair value hierarchy, if necessary, at the end of the reporting period. There were no transfers between levels during 2014 and 2013.
 
51

 

 

 
NOTE 13 – RESTRUCTURING CHARGES
 
During the year end December 31, 2014, the Company recorded $238,000 in restructuring expense.  This consisted of severance and related benefits costs due to the restructuring within the Transition Networks business segment, including ongoing costs related to the closure of the China facility.  The facility was completely closed in the second quarter of 2014. The Company paid $724,000 in restructuring charges in 2014 related to accruals at the end of 2013 as well as new charges in 2014 and we had no restructuring accruals recorded at December 31, 2014.
 
NOTE 14 – SUBSEQUENT EVENTS
 
The Company has evaluated subsequent events through the date of this filing. We do not believe there are any material subsequent events which would require further disclosure.

52

 

 

 
(b)    SUPPLEMENTAL FINANCIAL INFORMATION

Quarterly Operating Results
(in thousands except per share amounts)
Unaudited
                         
   
Quarter Ended
 
   
March 31
   
June 30
   
Sep 30
   
Dec 31
 
2014
                       
Sales
  $ 25,198     $ 33,209     $ 33,434     $ 27,230  
Gross margins
    8,988       12,094       12,013       9,064  
Operating (loss) income
    (252 )     2,406       2,658       (1,519 )
Net (loss) income
    (141 )     1,437       1,695       (1,029 )
                                 
Basic net (loss) income per share
  $ (0.02 )   $ 0.17     $ 0.20     $ (0.12 )
Diluted net (loss) income per share
  $ (0.02 )   $ 0.17     $ 0.20     $ (0.12 )
                                 
2013
                               
Sales
  $ 27,453     $ 31,937     $ 44,617     $ 27,313  
Gross margins
    9,776       11,528       13,623       9,972  
Operating income (loss)
    371       2,567       (1,696 )     (86 )
Net income (loss)
    242       1,639       (2,036 )     (803 )
                                 
Basic net income (loss) per share
  $ 0.03     $ 0.19     $ (0.24 )   $ (0.09 )
Diluted net income (loss) per share
  $ 0.03     $ 0.19     $ (0.24 )   $ (0.09 )

We recorded a $1.1 million inventory reserve charge within cost of sales in the Consolidated Income Statement associated with the identification of excess and obsolete inventory at our Transition Networks business unit during the fourth quarter of 2014.
 
ITEM 9.
 CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE
 
None.
 
ITEM 9A:
CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES
                      
Evaluation of Disclosure Controls and Procedures

Under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, we evaluated the effectiveness of the design and operation of our disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rule 13a-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”)). 
 
Our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer have concluded that, as of the end of the period covered by this report, our disclosure controls and procedures were effective to ensure that information required to be disclosed by us in the reports we file or submit under the Exchange Act is recorded, processed, summarized and reported, within the time periods specified in the applicable rule and forms.

Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting

Our management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting, as such term is defined in Exchange Act Rule 13a-15(f).  Under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, we conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting based on the framework in Internal control -- Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission .
 
53

 

 

 
Operating Effectiveness of Accounting and Control Procedures .   As a result of our evaluation, our management concluded that as of December 31, 2014, our internal control over financial reporting is effective .
 
Changes in Internal Control over Financial Reporting   There was   no change in the Company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the Company’s most recently completed fiscal quarter that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting .
 
The Company’s independent registered public accounting firm, Deloitte & Touche LLP, has issued a report on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2014. That report is set forth immediately following the report of Deloitte & Touche LLP on the consolidated financial statements included herein.
 
ITEM 9B. 
OTHER INFORMATION
 
JDL Multi-Year Contract
On March 9, 2015, the Company announced that its JDL Technologies, Inc., had been awarded a new contract by the School Board of Broward County to provide Local Area Network, Wireless Local Area Network and data center upgrades, among other IT services, to the public K-12 schools of Broward County, Florida.  The Company estimates that the contract has the potential to generate up to approximately $83 million of revenue over the next five years.  Although JDL Technologies expects to begin providing services under the contact in the second quarter of calendar 2015, JDL Technologies and the School Board of Broward County have not finalized the timing of the services that will be delivered under the contract.

2015 Executive Compensation
 
2015 Executive Officer Base Salaries
 
The Compensation Committee and the Board of Directors of Communications Systems, Inc. (the “Company”) approved annual base salaries for the following executive officers (who are expected to be the Company’s five highest paid executives in 2015) in the amounts respectively indicated effective January 1, 2015:
 
Executive Officer and Title
 
2015 Base Salary
 
% increase over 2014
 
       
Roger H. D. Lacey
Vice Chairman and CEO
 
 
$250,000
 
Edwin C. Freeman
Chief Financial Officer
 
 
$212,180
 
3%
Bruce Blackwood
President & General Manager,
Suttle Inc.
 
 
$214,283
 
5%
Scott Otis
President & General Manager,
Transition Networks, Inc.
 
 
$206,559
 
5%
Scott Fluegge
President &General Manager,
JDL Technologies, Inc.
 
$190,962
 
3%
 
Grant of 2015 Awards Under the Annual Bonus Plan
 
On February 27, 2015, pursuant to the Communications Systems, Inc. Annual Bonus Plan (“Bonus Plan”) the Compensation Committee and the Board awarded bonus opportunities to the executive officers named above (the “Named Executives”).
 
54

 

 

 
Under the Bonus Plan applicable to the 2015 fiscal year, the Compensation Committee determines quarterly and annual “minimum,” “target” and “maximum” performance goals for the Company’s three business units.  Performance measures for the three business units generally include revenue and operating income, with primary weight given to achieving revenue and operating income targets. Also, the performance goals are, in a number of instances, segmented such that 50% of the bonus opportunity is tied to achievement of quarterly or six month performance goals and 50% of the bonus opportunity is tied to achievement of performance goals for the fiscal year.  The three Named Executives leading business units earn bonuses based on achievement in comparison goals determined for their respective business unit, while the CEO and CFO will (i) earn 80% of their bonus based on achievement by the three business units compared to their respective goals, which will be weighted 54.5% with respect to Suttle’s performance, 36.8% as to Transition Network’s performance and 8.7% as to JDL’s performance and (ii) earn 20% of their potential long term incentive opportunity based on performance measures to be determined and approved by the Compensation Committee prior to March 31, 2015.  Bonuses for quarterly and six month goals during the first nine months of the fiscal year are paid approximately 45 days after the period measured and bonuses earned based on achievement in comparison in the last six months or fourth quarter and over the full year are paid out approximately 75 days after fiscal year end.  Payments of bonuses generally begin at achievement exceeding 80% or more of target performance goals. Bonuses are paid in cash.  The target and maximum bonus each Named Executive may potentially earn under the Annual Bonus Plan is based upon a percentage of their base salary.  Under the 2015 Plan, in general, the maximum bonus that may be paid to any Named Executive may not exceed two times his or her bonus at target for revenues and 1.5 times his or her bonus at target for operating income even if financial performance exceeds the maximum. Further, no bonus amounts will be earned by any Named Executive under the Bonus Plan for a quarter or the year if the minimum goals for that period are not achieved.  Named Executives must be employed by the Company as of the end of the relevant period (quarter, six month or full fiscal year) in order to be entitled to receive payout of any bonus earned for such period, unless termination of employment is due to death, disability or follows a change of control. The Compensation Committee must approve bonuses paid to the Named Executives before payment.
 
The following table shows potential bonus amounts as a percentage of salary that may be earned by the Named Executives for 2015 performance under the Plan upon achievement of their respective performance goals at target and maximum levels of performance. Under the 2015 Bonus Plan achievement in relation to performance goals below the target level results in a decreasing bonus, and if achievement fails to meet the minimum performance goals the Named Executive is not entitled to any bonus.
 
  Executive Officer and Title
 
Cash Bonus Payable if
Target Goals Achieved
 
Cash Bonus Payable if
Maximum Goals
 
Achieved
         
Roger H. D. Lacey
Vice Chairman and CEO
 
 
$150,000
 
$222,555
Edwin C. Freeman
Chief Financial Officer
 
 
$116,699
 
$172,913
Bruce Blackwood
President & General Manager,
Suttle , Inc.
 
 
$117,856
 
$206,247
Scott Otis
President & General Manager,
Transition Networks, Inc.
 
 
$113,608
 
$161,891
Scott Fluegge
President & General Manager,
JDL Technologies, Inc.
 
$105,029
 
$147,041
 
55

 

 

 
Grant of PSU Awards under the Long Term Incentive Plan
 
On February 27, 2015, pursuant to the Company’s Long Term Incentive Compensation Plan (the “LTI Plan”) the Compensation Committee determined the overall design and other features of the Company’s LTI Plan for the 2015 through 2017 performance period (the “2015-2017 Period”) as applied to the Named Executives.  For the 2015-2017 Period, it was determined that performance measures, weighting of performance measures, specific “minimum,” “target” and “maximum” goals for each performance measure, the dollar value of opportunities for the Named Executives to earn incentive compensation, in each case, at target and maximum level of performance and form of payment would be established at the beginning of each year, and that achievement in relation to target goals in each year would be determined and vested as of the end of the year, but with payment of such incentive compensation contingent upon continued employment through the end of the 2015-2017 Period.  For 2015, the first year of the three year period, it was determined that the performance measures and the minimum, target and maximum goals for business unit leaders would be specific to their business unit and that the CEO and CFO would (i) earn 80% of their potential long term incentive opportunity based on the success of the three business units in relation to achievement of their respective goals, weighted 54.5% with respect to Suttle’s performance, 36.8% as to Transition Network’s performance and 8.7% as to JDL’s performance and (ii) earn 20% of their potential long term incentive opportunity based on performance measures to be determined and approved by the Compensation Committee prior to March 31, 2015. The 2015 business unit performance measures and their percentage weighting established for Suttle and JDL were Revenue (50%) and Operating Income (50%), and the 2015 business unit performance measures and their percentage weighting for Transition Networks were Revenue (50%) and New Product Revenue (50%).   With respect to each Named Executive, the opportunity to earn long term compensation is initially determined as a dollar value that is a percentage of the Executive’s Base salary. In each case this dollar value will be divided by the average price of the Company’s stock over the 20 business day period beginning March 2, 2015, with the number so determined becoming an award of the same number of Performance Share Units (“PSUs”), with each PSU representing the potential issuance of one share of Company stock. At the completion of 2015, the Compensation Committee will assess actual performance against the performance measures established for each Named Executive and determine the number of shares of Company stock to be issued to each Named Executive following the end of the 2015-2017 Period.
 
The following table shows the dollar value of the PSUs awarded to each of the Named Executive that would result in the issuance of shares of Company common stock after the end of the 2015-2017 Period based on achievement of applicable 2015 target and maximum goals. Achievement below the target goal for each performance measure will result in a decreased number of shares being issued, and if achievement fails to meet any of the applicable minimum performance goals, the Named Executive will not be issued any shares under the PSUs that he was granted.
         
   
Dollar Value of PSUs Awarded in 2015 Under the
Company’s Long-term Incentive Plan
Executive Officer and Title
 
If Target Goals Achieved
 
If Maximum Goals Achieved
         
Roger H. D. Lacey
Vice Chairman and CEO
 
 
$96,250
 
 
$144,375
Edwin C. Freeman
Chief Financial Officer
 
 
$74,263
 
$111,395
Bruce Blackwood
President & General Manager,
Suttle Inc
 
 
$74,999
 
$112,499
Scott Otis
President & General Manager,
Transition Networks, Inc.
 
 
$72,296
 
$108,444
Scott Fluegge
President & General Manager,
JDL Technologies
 
$66,837
 
$100,255

Stock Options

Consistent with past practice, the Company will award stock options to the Named Executives on March 17, 2015.
 
56

 

 

 
PART III
 
  ITEM 10.
 DIRECTORS, EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
 
The information required by Item 401 under Regulation S-K, to the extent applicable to the Company’s directors, will be set forth under the caption “Election of Directors” in the Company’s definitive proxy material for its May 21, 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders (“2015 Proxy Materials”) and is incorporated herein by reference.  The information required with respect to the Company’s officers by paragraph (b) of Item 401 is set forth under Item 1(c) (3) of this Form 10-K.

The information required by Item 405 regarding compliance with Section 16 (a) will be set forth under the caption “Section 16(a) Beneficial Ownership Reporting Compliance” in the Company’s 2015 Proxy Materials, and is incorporated herein by reference.

Code of Ethics

The Company has adopted a Code of Ethics applicable to all officers of the Company as well as certain other key accounting personnel.  A copy of the Code of Ethics can be obtained free of charge upon written request directed to the Company’s Assistant Secretary at the executive offices of the Company.

The information required called for by Item 407 regarding corporate governance will be set forth under the caption “Corporate Governance and Board Matters” in the 2015 Proxy Materials and is incorporated herein by reference.
 
ITEM 11.  EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

The information called for by Item 402 under Regulation S-K, will be set forth under the caption “Executive Compensation” in the Company’s 2015 Proxy Materials, and is expressly incorporated herein by reference.
 
ITEM 12.
SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS

The information called for by Item 403 under Regulation S-K will be set forth under the captions “Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management” and “Election of Directors” in the Company’s 2015 Proxy Materials, and is incorporated herein by reference.
 
ITEM 13.
CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS, AND DIRECTOR INDEPENDENCE
 
The information required by Item 404 under Regulation S-K will be set forth under the caption “Certain Relationship and Related Transaction” in the Company’s 2015 Proxy Materials, and is incorporated herein by reference.
 
The information required by Item 407(a) will be set forth in the Company’s 2015 Proxy Materials caption “Corporate Governance and Board Matters” and is incorporated herein by reference.
 
ITEM 14.
PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTING FEES AND SERVICES
 
The information required by Item 14 of Form 10K and 9(e) of Schedule 14A will be set forth under the caption “Principal Accountant Fees and Services” in the Company’s 2015 Proxy Materials, and is incorporated herein by reference.
 
 
57

 

 

PART IV
 
ITEM 15.
EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES
 
(a)  
(1)   Consolidated Financial Statements

The following Consolidated Financial Statements of Communications Systems, Inc. and subsidiaries appear at pages 32 to 52 herein:
 
 
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
 
Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2014 and 2013
 
Consolidated Statements of Income (Loss) and Comprehensive Income (Loss) for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012
 
Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012
 
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

(a)  (2)  Consolidated Financial Statement Schedule
 
The following financial statement schedule is being filed as part of this Form 10-K Report:
 
 Schedule II - Valuation and Qualifying Accounts and Reserves
 
All other schedules are omitted as the required information is inapplicable or the information is presented in the consolidated financial statements or related notes.

(a)  (3)  Exhibits

The exhibits which accompany or are incorporated by reference in this report, including all exhibits required to be filed with this report pursuant to Item 601 of Regulation S-K, including each management or compensatory plan or arrangement are described on the Exhibit Index, which is at pages 62 through 65 of this report.

58

 

 


SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.
 
 
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC.
   
Dated: March 12, 2015  
/s/ Roger H.D. Lacey    
  Roger H.D. Lacey, Chief Executive Officer and Director
 
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the Registrant in the capacities and on the dates indicated:

Each person whose signature appears below constitutes and appoints ROGER H.D. LACEY and EDWIN C. FREEMAN as his true and lawful attorneys-in-fact and agents, each acting alone, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, for him and in his name, place and stead, in any and all capacities, to sign any or all amendments to this Annual Report on Form 10-K and to file the same, with all exhibits thereto, and other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, granting unto said attorneys-in-fact and agents, each acting alone, full power and authority to do and perform each and every act and thing requisite and necessary to be done in and about the premises, as fully to all intents and purposes as he might or could do in person, hereby ratifying and confirming all said attorneys-in-fact and agents, each acting alone, or his substitute or substitutes, may lawfully do or cause to be done by virtue thereof.
 
Signature
 
Title
 
Date
         
/s/Roger H.D. Lacey
 
Chief Executive Officer
 
March 12, 2015
Roger H.D. Lacey
 
and Director
   
         
         
/s/Edwin C. Freeman
 
Vice President, Treasurer and
 
March 12, 2015
Edwin C. Freeman
 
Chief Financial Officer (Principal
   
   
Financial Officer)
   
         
/s/Kristin A. Hlavka
 
Corporate Controller (Principal
 
March 12, 2015
Kristin A. Hlavka
 
Accounting Officer)
   
         
/s/Curtis A. Sampson
 
Chairman of the Board of Directors
 
March 12, 2015
Curtis A. Sampson
 
and Director
   
         
/s/Randall D. Sampson
 
Director
 
March 12, 2015
Randall D. Sampson
       
         
/s/Luella G. Goldberg
 
Director
 
March 12, 2015
Luella Gross Goldberg
       
         
/s/Gerald D. Pint
 
Director
 
March 12, 2015
Gerald D. Pint
       
         
/s/Richard A. Primuth
 
Director
 
March 12, 2015
Richard A. Primuth
       
 
59

 

 

 

 
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C.  20549

FORM 10-K
 
ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 or 15(d)

OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

OF

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC.

FOR

YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2014
 

 
FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULE
 

 
60

 

 

 
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
Schedule II - Valuation and Qualifying Accounts and Reserves

                               
Description
 
Balance at
Beginning of
Period
   
Additions
Charged to
and Expenses
   
Deductions
from
Reserves
   
Other
Changes
Add
   
Balance
at End
of Period
 
                               
Allowance for doubtful accounts:
                             
                               
Year ended:
                             
                               
December 31, 2014
  $ 69,000     $ 25,000     $ (72,000)(A )   $ 0     $ 22,000  
                                         
December 31, 2013
  $ 69,000     $ 23,000     $ (23,000)(A )   $ 0     $ 69,000  
                                         
December 31, 2012
  $ 175,000     $ 30,000     $ (136,000)(A )   $ 0     $ 69,000  
 

(A)
Accounts determined to be uncollectible and charged off against reserve.
 
61

 

 

 

 
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C.  20549

FORM 10-K
 
ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 or 15(d)
 
OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

OF

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC.

FOR

YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2014
 

 
EXHIBITS
 


62

 

 


COMMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
Exhibit Index To
Form 10-K for the Year Ended December 31, 2014
 
Regulation S-K
     
Location in Consecutive Numbering
Exhibit Table
     
System as Filed With the Securities
Reference
 
Title of Document
 
and Exchange Commission
3.1
 
Articles of Incorporation, as amended
 
Filed as Exhibit 3.1 to the Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2014 and incorporated herein by reference.
         
3.2
 
Bylaws, as amended
 
Filed as Exhibit 3.2 to the Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2014 and incorporated herein by reference.
         
3.3
 
Amended and Restated Certificate of Designation, Preferences and Rights of Series A Junior Participating Preferred Stock
 
Filed as Exhibit 4(a) to Form 8-A dated December 28, 2009 and incorporated herein by reference.
         
10.1
 
Credit Agreement dated as of October 28, 2011 between Communications Systems, Inc., JDL Technologies, Inc., Transition Networks, Inc. and Wells Fargo Bank, National Association
 
Filed as Exhibit 10.1 to the Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2011 and incorporated herein by reference.
         
10.1.1
 
First Amendment to Credit Agreement and Waiver of Event of Default dated as of November 28, 2012 between Communications Systems, Inc., JDL Technologies, Inc., Transition Networks, Inc. and Wells Fargo Bank, National Association
 
Filed as Exhibit 10.1.1 to the Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2012 and incorporated herein by reference.
         
10.1.2
 
Second Amendment to Credit Agreement and Waiver of Event of Default dated as of November 14, 2013 between Communications Systems, Inc., JDL Technologies, Inc., Transition Networks, Inc. and Wells Fargo Bank, National Association
 
Filed as Exhibit 10.1.2 to the Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2013 and incorporated herein by reference.
         
10.1.3
 
Third Amendment to Credit Agreement and First Amendment to Amended and Restated Revolving Note dated as of October 31, 2014 between Communications Systems, Inc., JDL Technologies, Inc., Transition Networks, Inc. and Wells Fargo Bank, National Association
 
Filed as Exhibit 10.1 to the Form 10-Q. for the quarter ended September 30, 2014 and incorporated herein by reference.
         
10.2
 
Revolving Line of Credit Note dated as of October 28, 2011 between Communications Systems, Inc., JDL Technologies, Inc., Transition Networks, Inc. and Wells Fargo Bank, National Association
 
Filed as Exhibit 10.1 to the Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2011 and incorporated herein by reference.
 
63

 

 


10.3
 
*
 
Employee Stock Ownership Plan and Trust, effective as of January 1, 2009
 
Filed as Exhibit 10.3 to the Form10-K for the year ended December 31, 2011 (2011 Form 10-K) and incorporated herein by reference.
             
10.3.1
 
*
 
First Amendment, dated October 21, 2011, to the Communications Systems, Inc. Employee Stock Ownership Plan and Trust.
 
Filed as Exhibit 10.3.1 to the 2011 Form 10-K and incorporated herein by reference
               
10.3.2
 
*
 
Third Amendment, dated December 14, 2012 to the Communications Systems, Inc. Employee Stock Ownership Plan and Trust.
 
Filed as Exhibit 10.1 to the Form 8-K dated December 14, 2012 and incorporated herein by reference
             
10.3.3
   
Fourth Amendment, dated January 1, 2015 to the Communications Systems, Inc. Employee Stock Ownership Plan and Trust
 
Filed herewith.
               
10.4
 
*
 
1990 Employee Stock Purchase Plan, as amended and restated May 19, 2011
 
Filed as Exhibit 99.4 to the Form 8-K dated May 19, 2011 and incorporated herein by reference.
             
10.5
 
*
 
1990 Stock Option Plan for Nonemployee Directors, as amended May 19, 2011
 
Filed as Exhibit 10.4 to the Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2011 and incorporated herein by reference.
               
10.6
 
*
 
1992 Stock Plan, as amended August 11, 2011
 
Filed as Exhibit 10.3 to the Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2011 and incorporated herein by reference.
             
10.7
 
*
 
Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan
 
Filed as Exhibit 10.8 to the 1993 Form 10-K and incorporated herein by reference.
               
10.8
 
*
 
Communications Systems Inc. Long Term Incentive Plan, as amended through March 1, 2012
 
Filed as Exhibit 99.2 to the Company’s Form 8-K dated March 9, 2012 and incorporated herein by reference.
               
10.10
 
*
 
Communications Systems Inc. 2011 Executive Compensation Plan
 
Filed as Exhibit 99.3 to the Form 8-K dated May 19, 2011, and incorporated herein by reference.
             
10.11
 
*
 
Communications Systems Inc. Annual Bonus Plan
 
Filed as Exhibit 99.1 to the Company’s Form 8-K dated March 9, 2012 and incorporated herein by reference.
               
10.12
     
Form of Rights Agreement, dated as of December 23, 2009 between Communications Systems, Inc. and Wells Fargo Bank National Association
 
Filed as Exhibit 4(b) to Form 8-A on December 28, 2009 and incorporated herein by reference.
               
99.1
     
Press Release dated March 9, 2015 on Broward County Public Schools Network Services Contract awarded to JDL Technologies, Inc.
 
Filed herewith.
 
* Indicates compensatory plans
 
64

 

 

 
COMMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
Exhibit Index To
Form 10-K for the Year Ended December 31, 2014
 
Regulation S-K 
Exhibit Table
Reference
  Title of Document  
Location in Consecutive Numbering
System as Filed With the Securities
and Exchange Commission  
21   Subsidiaries of the Registrant  
Filed herewith.
23   Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm  
Filed herewith.
24   Power of Attorney  
Included in signatures at page 59.
31.1   Certification of Chief Executive Officer  
Filed herewith.
31.2   Certification of Chief Financial Officer  
Filed herewith.
32   Certification under USC § 1350  
Filed herewith.
 
The exhibits referred to in this Exhibit Index will be supplied to a shareholder at a charge of $.25 per page upon written request directed to CSI’s Assistant Secretary at the executive offices of the Company.
 
65

 

Exhibit 10.3.3




COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC.
 
EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN AND TRUST
 
Established as of January 1, 1985
Amended and Restated as of January 1, 2015
 




 
 

 

 
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC.
EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN AND TRUST
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS
     
ARTICLE 1 INTRODUCTION
 
1
Section 1.01
Plan and Trust
 
1
Section 1.02
Employee Stock Ownership Plan
 
1
Section 1.03
Application of Amended and Restated Plan and Trust
 
 
1
ARTICLE 2 DEFINITIONS
 
2
“Account”
 
2
“Alternate Payee”
 
2
“Annual Addition”
 
2
“Beneficiary”
 
2
“Board”
 
2
“Code”
 
3
“Committee”
 
3
“Company”
 
3
“Company Stock”
 
3
“Company Stock Fund”
 
3
“Compensation”
 
3
“Disabled” or “Disability”
 
5
“Disqualified Person”
 
5
“Distribution Date”
 
5
“Effective Date”
 
5
“Eligible Employee”
 
5
“Employee”
 
6
“Employer”
 
6
“Employer Contribution”
 
6
“Employer Contribution Account”
 
6
“Employment Commencement Date”
 
6
“Entry Date”
 
6
“ERISA”
 
6
“ESOP Accounts”
 
6
“Exempt Loan”
 
6
“Highly Compensated Employee”
 
6
“Hour of Service”
 
7
“Investment Fiduciary”
 
8
“Investment Funds”
 
8
“Investment Manager”
 
8
“Key Employee”
 
8
“Leased Employee”
 
8
“Leveraged Shares”
 
9
“Limitation Year”
 
9
“More Than 5% Owner”
 
9
“Non-Key Employee”
 
9
 
i

 

 

 
“Nonhighly Compensated Employee”
 
9
“Normal Retirement Age”
 
9
“One-Year Break in Service”
 
9
“Participant”
 
9
“Permissive Aggregation Group”
 
9
“Plan”
 
9
“Plan Administrator”
 
9
“Plan Sponsor”
 
10
“Plan Year”
 
10
“Present Value”
 
10
“Qualified Domestic Relations Order”
 
10
“Qualified Holder”
 
10
“Released and Unallocated Account”
 
10
“Required Aggregation Group”
 
10
“Required Beginning Date”
 
10
“S Corporation”
 
10
“Suspense Account”
 
10
“Termination” and “Termination of Employment”
 
10
“Testing Compensation”
 
11
“Top-Heavy Ratio”
 
11
“Transfer Account”
 
12
“Trust Fund”
 
12
“Trustee”
 
13
“Valuation Date”
 
13
“Vesting Computation Period”
 
13
“Year of Vesting Service”
 
 
13
ARTICLE 3 PARTICIPATION
 
13
Section 3.01
Employer Contributions
 
13
Section 3.02
Transfers
 
13
Section 3.03
Termination and Rehires
 
14
Section 3.04
Limitations on Exclusions
 
14
Section 3.05
Procedures for Admission
 
 
14
ARTICLE 4 CONTRIBUTIONS
 
15
Section 4.01
Employer Contributions
 
15
Section 4.02
Rollover Contributions
 
16
Section 4.03
Transfers
 
16
Section 4.04
Military Service
 
16
Section 4.05
Multiple Employer Plan
 
 
17
ARTICLE 5 SPECIAL ESOP PROVISIONS
 
17
Section 5.01
ESOP Contributions
 
17
Section 5.02
Exempt Loan
 
18
Section 5.03
Release of Company Stock
 
18
Section 5.04
Prohibited Allocation
 
20
Section 5.05
Non-ESOP Portion of Plan
 
23
 
ii

 

 

 
ARTICLE 6 LIMITATIONS ON CONTRIBUTIONS
 
25
Section 6.01
Maximum Amount of Annual Additions
 
 
25
ARTICLE 7 VESTING
 
27
Section 7.01
Employer Contributions
 
27
Section 7.02
Forfeitures
 
 
28
ARTICLE 8 DISTRIBUTIONS
 
29
Section 8.01
Commencement of Distributions
 
29
Section 8.02
Timing and Form of Distributions
 
30
Section 8.03
Cash-Out of Small Balances
 
33
Section 8.04
Beneficiary
 
34
Section 8.05
Minimum Distribution Requirements
 
34
Section 8.06
Direct Rollovers
 
39
Section 8.07
Minor or Legally Incompetent Payee
 
41
Section 8.08
Missing Payee
 
41
Section 8.09
Distributions Upon Termination of Plan
 
 
42
ARTICLE 9 INSERVICE DISTRIBUTIONS
 
42
Section 9.01
Transfer Account
 
 
42
ARTICLE 10 INVESTMENT AND VALUATION OF TRUST FUND
 
42
Section 10.01
Investment of Assets
 
42
Section 10.02
Participant Self Direction
 
42
Section 10.03
Individual Accounts
 
44
Section 10.04
Qualifying Employer Investments
 
44
Section 10.05
Allocation of Earnings and Losses
 
44
Section 10.06
Voting Rights
 
45
Section 10.07
Liquidity
 
46
Section 10.08
Restrictions on Company Stock
 
46
Section 10.09
Treatment of Dividends
 
47
Section 10.10
Use of Appraiser
 
 
48
ARTICLE 11 TRUST FUND
 
48
Section 11.01
Trust Fund
 
48
Section 11.02
Duties of the Trustee
 
49
Section 11.03
General Investment Powers
 
50
Section 11.04
Other Investment Powers
 
53
Section 11.05
Instructions
 
54
Section 11.06
Investment of the Fund
 
55
Section 11.07
Compensation and Indemnification
 
56
Section 11.08
Resignation and Removal
 
56
Section 11.09
Transactional Trustee
 
 
57
ARTICLE 12 SPECIAL TOP-HEAVY RULES
 
58
Section 12.01
Top-Heavy Status
 
58
Section 12.02
Minimum Allocations
 
58
 
iii

 

 

 
Section 12.03
Minimum Vesting
 
 
59
ARTICLE 13 PLAN ADMINISTRATION
 
59
Section 13.01
Plan Administrator
 
59
Section 13.02
Investment Fiduciary
 
61
Section 13.03
Compensation of Plan Administrator and Investment Fiduciary
 
62
Section 13.04
Plan Expenses
 
62
Section 13.05
Allocation of Fiduciary Responsibility
 
62
Section 13.06
Indemnification
 
62
Section 13.07
Claims Procedures
 
62
Section 13.08
Written Communication
 
 
63
ARTICLE 14 AMENDMENT, MERGER AND TERMINATION
 
64
Section 14.01
Amendment
 
64
Section 14.02
Merger and Transfer
 
65
Section 14.03
Termination
 
 
65
ARTICLE 15 MISCELLANEOUS
 
66
Section 15.01
Nonalienation of Benefits
 
66
Section 15.02
Rights of Alternate Payees
 
67
Section 15.03
No Right To Employment
 
68
Section 15.04
No Right To Trust Assets
 
68
Section 15.05
Governing Law
 
68
Section 15.06
Severability of Provisions
 
68
Section 15.07
Headings and Captions
 
68
Section 15.08
Gender and Number
 
68
 
iv

 

 

 
PREAMBLE
 
THIS AGREEMENT, restating the Communications Systems, Inc. Employee Stock Ownership Plan and Trust, is adopted by Communications Systems, Inc., a Minnesota corporation (the “Company”), and Curtis A. Sampson, Roger H.D. Lacey and Edwin C. Freeman (collectively, the “Trustee”), and is effective as of January 1, 2015.
 
W I T N E S S E T H :
 
WHEREAS, the Company established a stock bonus plan for the benefit of its Employees effective January 1, 1985 which satisfies the requirements of a leveraged employee stock ownership plan under Sections 401(a) and 4975(e)(7) of the Internal Revenue Code; and
 
WHEREAS, the Plan has been amended from time to time, and has continued in force at all times since its effective date; and
 
WHEREAS, the Company desires to restate the Plan to comply with recent changes in federal law; and
 
WHEREAS, Curtis A. Sampson has agreed to continue to serve as a Trustee of the Trust established hereunder, and Roger H.D. Lacey and Edwin C. Freeman have agreed to serve as Trustees as of the Effective Date;
 
NOW, THEREFORE, Communications Systems, Inc. Employee Stock Ownership Plan and Trust is amended and restated in its entirety effective January 1, 2015 to read as follows:
 
ARTICLE 1
INTRODUCTION
 
Section 1.01        Plan and Trust
 
The Plan Sponsor hereby amends and restates this Plan effective January 1, 2015. This Plan and its related Trust are intended to qualify as a tax-exempt plan and trust under Code sections 401(a) and 501(a), respectively.
 
Section 1.02        Employee Stock Ownership Plan
 
The ESOP Accounts and the applicable portion of the Trust are also intended to qualify as a tax-exempt employee stock ownership plan and trust under Code section 4975(e)(7). The ESOP Accounts of the Plan shall be invested primarily in Company Stock.
 
Section 1.03        Application of Amended and Restated Plan and Trust
 
Except as otherwise specifically provided herein, the provisions of this amended and restated Plan shall apply to those individuals who are Eligible Employees of the Company on or after January 1, 2015. Except as otherwise specifically provided for herein, the rights and benefits, if any, of former Eligible Employees of the Company whose employment terminated prior to January 1, 2015, shall be determined under the provisions of the Plan, as in effect from time to time prior to that date.
 
 
 

 

 
ARTICLE 2
DEFINITIONS
 
Account   means the balance of a Participant’s interest in the Trust Fund as of the applicable date as adjusted pursuant to Article 10. “Account” or “Accounts” shall include, for any Participant, his Employer Contribution Account, Transfer Account and such other account(s) or subaccount(s) as the Plan Administrator, in its discretion, deems appropriate.
 
Alternate Payee   means the person entitled to receive payment of benefits under the Plan pursuant to a Qualified Domestic Relations Order.
 
Annual Addition means the sum of the following amounts credited to a Participant’s accounts with this Plan and any other qualified plan maintained by the Employer for the Limitation Year:
 
(a)           Employer Contributions;
 
(b)           Participant contributions, including excess deferrals (other than excess deferrals that are distributed in accordance with Treas. Reg. section 1.402(g)-1(e)(2)), distributed or recharacterized excess contributions, and excess aggregate contributions, if any, but excluding catch-up contributions, rollover contributions and trustee to trustee transfers;
 
(c)           any forfeitures that are, under the Plan, reallocated and not used to reduce Employer Contributions;
 
(d)           amounts allocated to an individual medical account, as defined in Code section 415(l)(2), which is part of a pension or annuity plan maintained by the Employer;
 
(e)           amounts allocated to a separate account of a Key Employee under an Employer-sponsored welfare benefit fund, as defined in Code section 419(e), which will provide postretirement medical benefits;
 
(f)            mandatory employee contributions, as defined in Code section 411(c)(2)(C) and Treas. Reg. section 1.411(c)-1(c)(4), to a defined benefit plan; and
 
(g)           allocations under a simplified employee pension.
 
Notwithstanding the foregoing, an Annual Addition shall not include a restorative payment within the meaning of IRS Revenue Ruling 2002-45 and any superseding guidance.
 
Beneficiary  means the person(s) entitled to receive benefits, under Section 8.04 of the Plan, upon the Participant’s death.
 
Board   means the Board of Directors of the Plan Sponsor.
 
2

 

 

 
Code   means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time.
 
Committee   means the Committee that may be appointed by the Plan Sponsor pursuant to Section 13.01 to serve as Plan Administrator.
 
Company  means the Plan Sponsor and any other entity that has adopted the Plan with the approval of the Plan Sponsor.  As of the Effective Date, “Company” shall mean Communications Systems, Inc., Transition Networks, Inc.,  JDL Technologies, Inc. and Suttle, Inc.
 
Company Stock   means common stock issued by the Employer which is readily tradable on an established securities market. If there is no common stock which is readily tradable on an established securities market, the term “Company Stock” means common stock issued by the Employer having a combination of voting power and dividend rights equal to or in excess of (i) that class of common stock of the Employer having the greatest voting power, and (ii) that class of common stock of the Employer having the greatest dividend rights. Noncallable preferred stock shall be treated as Company Stock if such stock is convertible at any time into stock which meets the foregoing requirements and if such conversion is at a conversion price which is reasonable. For purposes of the preceding sentence, under regulations prescribed by the Secretary, preferred stock shall be treated as noncallable if after the call there will be a reasonable opportunity for a conversion which meets the requirements of the preceding sentence. Nonvoting common stock of an employer described in the second sentence of Code section 401(a)(22) shall be treated as Company Stock if an employer has a class of nonvoting common stock outstanding and the specific shares that the plan acquires have been issued and outstanding for at least 24 months. For purposes of the definition of “Company Stock” the term Employer means the Plan Sponsor and any other organization required to be aggregated with pursuant to Code section 409(l)(4).
 
Company Stock Fund   means the Investment Fund which is invested primarily in Company Stock.
 
Compensation   shall mean, except as provided below, the regular or base salary or wages, overtime, commissions and bonuses received by a Participant from the Company during the Plan Year, including the value of any noncash property includable in base salary or wages. Compensation shall also include any amount which is contributed by the Company pursuant to a salary reduction agreement and which is not includable in the gross income of the Employee under Code sections 125, 132(f)(4), 457, 402(g)(3), or 403(b). Amounts not includible in gross income under Code section 125 shall include any amounts not available to a Participant in cash in lieu of group health coverage because the Participant is unable to certify that he or she has other health coverage (“deemed Code section 125 compensation”). An amount will be treated as an amount under Code section 125 only if the Company does not request or collect information regarding the Participant’s other health coverage as part of the enrollment process for the health plan.
 
Compensation shall include only that compensation which is actually paid to the Participant by the Company during that part of the Plan Year (or such other period used to determine Compensation for allocation purposes) the Participant is eligible to participate in the Plan.
 
3

 

 

 
Compensation shall include other compensation paid by the later of 2-1/2 months after a Participant’s severance from employment with the Company or the end of the Limitation Year that includes the date of severance from employment if: (a) the payment is regular compensation for services during the Participant’s regular working hours, or compensation for services outside the Participant’s regular working hours (e.g., overtime or shift differential), commissions, bonuses, or other similar payments; and (b) the payment would have been paid to the Participant prior to a severance from employment if the Participant had continued in employment with the Company. The exclusions from compensation for payments after severance from employment do not apply to payments to a Participant who does not currently perform services for the Company by reason of qualified military service (as that term is used in Code section 414(u)(1)) to the extent those payments do not exceed the amounts the Participant would have received if the individual had continued to perform services for the Company rather than entering qualified military service.
 
Deferred compensation shall be included in compensation if those amounts would have been included in the definition of Compensation if they were paid prior to the Participant’s severance from employment with the Company, and the amounts are received pursuant to a nonqualified unfunded deferred compensation plan, but only if the payment would have been paid if the Participant had continued in employment with the Company and only to the extent that the payment is includible in the Participant’s gross income.
 
Compensation shall not include reimbursements or other expense allowances, fringe benefits (cash and noncash), moving expenses, welfare benefits, contributions by the Company to this Plan or to any pension, profit sharing or annuity plan intended to qualify under Section 401 of the Code, as amended, amounts realized from the exercise, sale or exchange of stock options, or amounts paid to an Employee for services rendered while the Employee is not a Participant as herein defined.
 
For any Plan Year, the annual compensation of each Participant taken into account in determining allocations for any Plan Year shall not exceed $200,000, as adjusted for cost-of-living increases in accordance with Code section 401(a)(17)(B). Annual compensation means Compensation during the Plan Year or such other consecutive 12-month period over which Compensation is otherwise determined under the Plan (the determination period). The cost-of-living adjustment in effect for a calendar year applies to annual compensation for the determination period that begins with or within such calendar year.
 
If a determination period consists of fewer than 12 months, the annual Compensation limit is an amount equal to the otherwise applicable annual Compensation limit multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months in the short determination period, and the denominator of which is 12.
 
Determination Date   means the last day of the preceding Plan Year.
 
4

 

 

Disabled ” or “ Disability  means a physical or mental condition of a Participant resulting from a bodily injury or disease or mental disorder that renders the Participant incapable of continuing employment with the Employer. Disability of any Participant shall be determined by the Employer in accordance with uniform principles consistently applied, upon the basis of such medical and other evidence that the Employer deems necessary and desirable.
 
Disqualified Person means a person defined in Code section 4975(e)(2), including but not limited to (i) a fiduciary of the Plan; (ii) a person providing services to the Plan; (iii) the Employer; (iv) an owner of 50% or more of the combined voting power or value of all classes of stock of the Plan Sponsor entitled to vote or the total value of shares of all classes of stock of the Plan Sponsor and certain members of such owner’s family; or (v) an officer, director, 10% or greater shareholder or highly compensated employee (who earns 10% or more of the yearly wages) of the Employer.
 
Distribution Date means the date payment to a distributee is made or commenced.
 
Effective Date  means January 1, 2015; provided, however, that when a provision of the Plan states an effective date other than January 1, 2015, such stated specific effective date shall apply as to that provision. The Plan is an amendment and restatement of a Plan that was originally effective January 1, 1985.
 
Eligibility Computation Period ” means a 12 consecutive month period beginning with an Employee’s Employment Commencement Date; provided however, his succeeding Eligibility Computation Period for such purpose will switch to the Plan Year, beginning with the Plan Year that includes the first anniversary of his Employment Commencement Date.

Eligible Employee  means any Employee employed by the Company, except that the term “Eligible Employee” shall not include the following:
 
(a)           any Employee who is included in a unit of Employees covered by a collective bargaining agreement, if retirement benefits were the subject of good faith bargaining, and if the collective bargaining agreement does not provide for participation in this Plan;
 
(b)           any Leased Employees;
 
(c)           any Employee who is a non-resident alien who received no earned income (within the meaning of Code section 911(d)(2)) which constitutes income from services performed within the United States (within the meaning of Code section 861(a)(3)); and
 
(d)           any Employees of any other employer required to be aggregated with the Company under Code sections 414(b), (c), (m) or (o), unless and until such other employer has specifically adopted the Plan in writing. In addition, an individual who becomes employed by the Employer in a transaction between the Employer and another entity that is a stock or asset acquisition, merger, or other similar transaction involving a change in the employer of the employees of the trade or business shall not become eligible to participate in the Plan until such time as the Plan Sponsor specifically authorizes such participation.
 
5

 

 

 
If an individual is subsequently reclassified as, or determined to be, an Employee by a court, the Internal Revenue Service or any other governmental agency or authority, or if the Company is required to reclassify such individual as an Employee as a result of such reclassification or determination (including any reclassification by the Company in settlement of any claim or action relating to such individual’s employment status), such individual shall not become an Eligible Employee by reason of such reclassification or determination.
 
Employee  means any individual who is a common law employee of the Employer. The term “Employee” includes any Leased Employee of the Employer. No Leased Employee may become a Participant hereunder unless he becomes an Eligible Employee. The term “Employee” shall not include a person who is classified by the Employer as an independent contractor or a person who is not treated as an employee for purposes of withholding federal employment taxes.
 
Employer  means the Company or any other employer required to be aggregated with the Company under Code sections 414(b), (c), (m) or (o); provided , however , that “Employer” shall not include any entity or unincorporated trade or business prior to the date on which such entity, trade or business satisfies the affiliation or control tests described above. In identifying “Employer” for purposes of Section 6.01, the definition in Code sections 414(b) and (c) shall be modified as provided in Code section 415(h).
 
Employer Contribution  means a contribution made by the Company that is allocated to a Participant’s Employer Contribution Account pursuant to Article 4.
 
Employer Contribution Account  means that portion of a Participant’s Account consisting of Employer Contributions (and corresponding earnings) made to the Plan.
 
Employment Commencement Date  means the first date on which the Eligible Employee performs an Hour of Service.
 
Entry Date  means the January 1 and July 1 of each Plan Year.
 
ERISA  means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, all amendments thereto and all federal regulations promulgated pursuant thereto.
 
ESOP Accounts  means those Accounts constituting the ESOP portion of the Plan. The ESOP Accounts shall be invested in the Company Stock Fund.
 
Exempt Loan  means an extension of credit to the Plan which satisfies the requirements of Treas. Reg. section 54.4975-7(b) and Department of Labor Reg. section 2550.408(b)-3, or any future law or regulation that modifies either or both of such regulations and affects the exemption for such loans to an employee stock ownership plan.
 
Highly Compensated Employee  means any Employee who during the Plan Year performs services for the Employer and who:
 
(a)           was a More Than 5% Owner at any time during the Plan Year or the preceding Plan Year; or
 
6

 

 

 
(b)           during the calendar year beginning with or within the preceding Plan Year received Testing Compensation in excess of the Code section 414(q)(1) amount ($80,000 as adjusted) and was a member of the top paid group of Employees within the meaning of Code section 414(q)(3).
 
The determination of who is a Highly Compensated Employee will be made in accordance with Code section 414(q) and the regulations thereunder to the extent they are not inconsistent with the method established above.
 
The term Highly Compensated Employee also includes a former Employee who was a Highly Compensated Employee when he separated from service or at any time after attaining age 55.
 
Hour of Service  means:
 
(a)           Each hour for which an Employee is paid, or entitled to payment, for the performance of duties for the Employer. These hours will be credited to the Employee for the computation period in which the duties are performed.
 
(b)           Each hour for which an Employee is paid, or entitled to payment, by the Employer on account of a period of time during which no duties are performed (irrespective of whether the employment relationship has terminated) due to vacation, holiday, illness, incapacity (including disability), layoff, jury duty, military duty or leave of absence. No more than 501 Hours of Service will be credited under this paragraph for any single continuous period (whether or not such period occurs in a single computation period). Hours under this paragraph will be calculated and credited pursuant to DOL Reg. section 2530.200b-2 which is incorporated herein by this reference.
 
(c)           Each hour for which back pay, irrespective of mitigation of damages, is either awarded or agreed to by the Employer. The same Hours of Service will not be credited both under paragraph (a) or paragraph (b), as the case may be, and under this paragraph (c). These hours will be credited to the Employee for the computation period or periods to which the award or agreement pertains rather than the computation period in which the award, agreement or payment is made.
 
Solely for purposes of determining whether a One-Year Break in Service has occurred, an individual who is absent from work for maternity or paternity reasons shall receive credit for the Hours of Service which would otherwise have been credited to such individual but for such absence, or in any case in which such hours cannot be determined, 8 Hours of Service per day of such absence. For purposes of this paragraph, an absence from work for maternity or paternity reasons means an absence (1) by reason of the pregnancy of the individual, (2) by reason of a birth of a child of the individual, (3) by reason of the placement of a child with the individual in connection with the adoption of such child by such individual, or (4) for purposes of caring for such child for a period beginning immediately following such birth or placement. The Hours of Service credited under this paragraph shall be credited (1) in the computation period in which the absence begins if the crediting is necessary to prevent a break in service in that period, or (2) in all other cases, in the following computation period.
 
7

 

 

 
If the Employer is a member of an affiliated service group (under Code section 414(m)), a controlled group of corporations (under Code section 414(b)), a group of trades or businesses under common control (under Code section 414(c)) or any other entity required to be aggregated with the Employer pursuant to Code section 414(o), service will be credited for any employment with such groups during the time the Employer is a member of the applicable group. Service will also be credited for any individual considered an Employee for purposes of this Plan under Code sections 414(n) or 414(o).
 
Where the Employer does not have records from which the number of an Employee’s Hours of Service can be ascertained, the Employee shall be credited with 45 Hours of Service for each week during which the Employee is entitled to at least one Hour of Service. If the Employer maintains the plan of a predecessor employer, service with such employer will be treated as service for the Employer.
 
Service with respect to qualified military service shall be credited in accordance with Code section 414(u) and service shall also be determined to the extent required by the Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993.
 
Investment Fiduciary  means the persons designated pursuant to Section 13.02.
 
Investment Funds  means the funds, including the Company Stock Fund, in which the Trust Fund is invested.
 
Investment Manager  means an investment manager as described in section 3(38) of ERISA.
 
Key Employee  means any employee or former employee (including any deceased employee) who at any time during the Plan Year that includes the Determination Date is an officer of the Employer having an annual Testing Compensation greater than $130,000 (as adjusted under Code section 416(i)(1)), a More Than 5% Owner of the Employer, or a 1-percent owner of the Employer having Testing Compensation of more than $150,000. The determination of who is a Key Employee will be made in accordance with Code section 416(i)(1) and the applicable regulations and other guidance of general applicability issued thereunder.
 
Leased Employee  means any person (other than an employee of the Employer) who pursuant to an agreement between the Employer and any other person (“leasing organization”) has performed services for the Employer (or for the Employer and related persons determined in accordance with Code section 414(n)(6)) on a substantially full time basis for a period of at least one year, and such services are performed under primary direction or control by the Employer. Contributions or benefits provided a Leased Employee by the leasing organization which are attributable to services performed for the Employer shall be treated as provided by the Employer. A person shall not be considered a Leased Employee if: (i) such person is covered by a money purchase pension plan providing: (1) a nonintegrated employer contribution rate of at least 10 percent of compensation, as defined in Code section 415(c)(3), but including amounts contributed pursuant to a salary reduction agreement which are excludable from the employee’s gross income under Code sections 125, 132(f)(4), 402(e)(3), 402(h) or 403(b), (2) immediate participation, and (3) full and immediate vesting; and (ii) Leased Employees do not constitute more than 20 percent of the Employer’s nonhighly compensated work force.
 
8

 

 

 
Leveraged Shares  means shares of Company Stock acquired by the Trustee with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan pursuant to Article 5.
 
Limitation Year  means the Plan Year. All qualified plans maintained by the Employer must use the same Limitation Year. If the Limitation Year is amended to a different 12-consecutive month period, the new Limitation Year must begin on a date within the Limitation Year in which the amendment is made.
 
More Than 5% Owner  means any person who owns (either directly or by attribution, under Code section 318) more than 5% of the outstanding stock of the Employer or stock possessing more than 5% of the total combined voting power of all stock of the Employer or, in the case of an unincorporated business, any person who owns more than 5% of the capital or profits interest in the Employer. For purposes of Section 8.05, a Participant is treated as a More Than 5% Owner if such Participant is a More Than 5% Owner at any time during the Plan Year ending with or within the calendar year in which such owner attains age 70½ and shall continue to be considered a More Than 5% Owner (and distributions must continue under Section 8.05) even if the Participant ceases to be a 5-percent owner in a subsequent year.
 
Non-Key Employee  means any Employee or former Employee who is not a Key Employee.
 
Nonhighly Compensated Employee  means an Employee who is not a Highly Compensated Employee.
 
Normal Retirement Age  means attainment of age 65.
 
One-Year Break in Service  means, for purposes of determining a Year of Vesting Service, a Vesting Computation Period during which an Employee is credited with 500 or fewer Hours of Service.
 
Participant  means an Eligible Employee who participates in the Plan in accordance with Article 3.
 
Permissive Aggregation Group  means the Required Aggregation Group of plans, plus any other plan or plans of the Employer which, when considered as a group with the Required Aggregation Group, would continue to satisfy the requirements of Code sections 401(a)(4) and 410.
 
Plan  means the Communications Systems, Inc. Employee Stock Ownership Plan, as set forth in this instrument and any amendments or supplements thereto.
 
Plan Administrator  means the person(s) designated pursuant to Section 13.01 of the Plan. The Plan Administrator is a “named fiduciary” within the meaning of ERISA section 402(a)(2).
 
9

 

 

 
Plan Sponsor  means Communications Systems, Inc. and any successor thereto. Communications Systems, Inc. is a “C corporation” under Subtitle A, Chapter 1, Subchapter C of the Code.
 
Plan Year  means the 12-consecutive month period ending on each December 31.
 
Present Value ” means a benefit in a defined benefit plan of equivalent value.
 
Qualified Domestic Relations Order  means any judgment, decree, or order (including approval of a property settlement agreement) that constitutes a “qualified domestic relations order” within the meaning of Code section 414(p). Effective April 6, 2007, pursuant to DOL regulation section 2530.206, a domestic relations order will not fail to be a Qualified Domestic Relations Order solely because the domestic relations order: (i) revises or is issued after another domestic relations order or Qualified Domestic Relations Order, or (ii) the domestic relations order is issued after the Participant’s death, divorce or annuity starting date.
 
Qualified Holder  means (a) the Participant; (b) the Participant’s donee; and (c) a person (including an estate or its distributee) to whom Company Stock passes by reason of the Participant’s death.
 
Released and Unallocated Account  means the account established and maintained in the Trust to hold Company Stock released from the Suspense Account, as described in Article 5, but not yet allocated to Participants’ Accounts and dividends thereon.
 
Required Aggregation Group  means (a) each qualified plan of the Employer in which at least one Key Employee participates or participated at any time during the Plan Year containing the Determination Date or any of the four preceding Plan Years (regardless of whether the Plan has terminated), and (b) any other qualified plan of the Employer which enables a plan described in (a) to meet the requirements of Code sections 401(a)(4) or 410.
 
Required Beginning Date  means April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70½ or the calendar year in which the Participant retires, except that benefit distributions to a More Than 5% Owner must commence by April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70½. However, for a Participant other than a More Than 5% Owner: (i) the Required Beginning Date is the April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70½; or (ii) the Participant may elect to begin receiving distributions at the date specified in the preceding sentence or the date specified in clause (i) of this sentence.
 
S Corporation  means a corporation described in Code section 1361(a)(1) for which an election under Code section 1362(a) is in effect.
 
Suspense Account  means the account established and maintained in the Trust to hold Company Stock acquired with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan, which has not yet been released pursuant to Article 5, and dividends thereon.
 
Termination ” and “ Termination of Employment  means any absence from service that ends the employment of the Employee with the Employer.
 
10

 

 

 
Testing Compensation  means only those items specified in Treas. Reg. section 1.415(c)-2(b)(1) and excluding all of those items listed in Treas. Reg. section 1.415(c)-2(c).
 
Testing Compensation shall include any amount which is contributed by the Company pursuant to a salary reduction agreement and which is not includible in the gross income of the Participant under Code sections 125, 132(f)(4), 457, 402(g)(3), or 403(b).
 
Testing Compensation shall include other compensation paid by the later of 2½ months after a Participant’s severance from employment with the Company or the end of the Limitation Year that includes the date of severance from employment if: (a) the payment is regular compensation for services during the Participant’s regular working hours, or compensation for services outside the Participant’s regular working hours (e.g., overtime or shift differential), commissions, bonuses, or other similar payments; and (b) the payment would have been paid to the Participant prior to a severance from employment if the Participant had continued in employment with the Company. The exclusions from compensation for payments after severance from employment do not apply to payments to a Participant who does not currently perform services for the Company by reason of qualified military service (as that term is used in Code section 414(u)(1)) to the extent those payments do not exceed the amounts the Participant would have received if the individual had continued to perform services for the Company rather than entering qualified military service. To the extent provided in the Plan, Testing Compensation shall include compensation paid to a Participant who is permanently and totally disabled.
 
Notwithstanding any other provision hereof to the contrary, the annual Testing Compensation of each Employee taken into account under the Plan for any Plan Year shall not exceed the amount in effect for such year under Code section 401(a)(17). If a Plan Year consists of fewer than 12 months, the applicable limitation under Code section 401(a)(17) will be multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months in such year, and the denominator of which is 12.
 
Top-Heavy Ratio  means:
 
(a)           If the Employer maintains one or more defined contribution plans (including any simplified employee pension plan) and the Employer has not maintained any defined benefit plan which during the five-year period ending on the Determination Date(s) has or has had accrued benefits, the Top-Heavy Ratio for this Plan alone or for the Required or Permissive Aggregation Group, as appropriate, is a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of the account balances of all Key Employees as of the Determination Date(s), including any part of any account balance distributed in the one-year period ending on the Determination Date(s), (five-year period ending on the Determination Date in the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death or disability), and the denominator of which is the sum of all account balances (including any part of any account balance distributed in the one-year period ending on the Determination Date(s)) (five-year period ending on the Determination Date in the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death or disability), both computed in accordance with Code section 416 and the regulations thereunder. Both the numerator and denominator of the Top-Heavy Ratio are increased to reflect any contribution not actually made as of the Determination Date, but which is required to be taken into account on that date under Code section 416 and the regulations thereunder.
 
11

 

 

 
(b)           If the Employer maintains one or more defined contribution plans (including any simplified employee pension plan) and the Employer maintains or has maintained one or more defined benefit plans which during the five-year period ending on the Determination Date(s) has or has had any accrued benefits, the Top-Heavy Ratio for any Required or Permissive Aggregation group, as appropriate, is a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of account balances under the aggregated defined contribution plan or plans for all Key Employees, determined in accordance with (a) above, and the Present Value of accrued benefits under the aggregated defined benefit plan or plans for all Key Employees as of the Determination Date(s), and the denominator of which is the sum of the account balances under the aggregated defined contribution plan or plans for all Participants, determined in accordance with (a) above, and the Present Value of accrued benefits under the defined benefit plan or plans for all Participants as of the Determination Date(s), all determined in accordance with Code section 416 and the regulations thereunder. The accrued benefits under a defined benefit plan in both the numerator and denominator of the Top-Heavy Ratio are increased for any distribution of an accrued benefit made in the one-year period ending on the Determination Date (five-year period ending on the Determination Date in the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death or disability).
 
(c)           For purposes of (a) and (b) above the value of account balances and the Present Value of accrued benefits will be determined as of the most recent Valuation Date that falls within or ends with the 12-month period ending on the Determination Date, except as provided in Code section 416 and the regulations thereunder for the first and second Plan Years of a defined benefit plan. The account balances and accrued benefits of a Participant (1) who is a Non Key Employee but who was a Key Employee in a prior year, or (2) who has not been credited with at least one hour of service with any Employer maintaining the Plan at any time during the one-year period ending on the Determination Date will be disregarded. The calculation of the Top-Heavy Ratio, and the extent to which distributions, rollovers, and transfers are taken into account will be made in accordance with Code section 416 and the regulations thereunder. Deductible employee contributions will not be taken into account for purposes of computing the Top-Heavy Ratio. When aggregating plans the value of account balances and accrued benefits will be calculated with reference to the Determination Dates that fall within the same calendar year.
 
The accrued benefit of a Non Key Employee shall be determined under: (x) the method, if any, that uniformly applies for accrual purposes under all defined benefit plans maintained by the Employer; or (y) if there is no such method, as if such benefit accrued not more rapidly than the slowest accrual rate permitted under the fractional rule of Code section 411(b)(1)(C).
 
Transfer Account  means so much of a Participant’s Account as consists of amounts transferred from another eligible retirement plan (and corresponding earnings) pursuant to Article 4 in a transaction that was not an eligible rollover distribution within the meaning of Code section 402.
 
Trust Fund  means all of the assets of the Plan held by the Trustee pursuant to Article 11.
 
12

 

 

 
Trustee  means the undersigned Trustee or Trustees or any duly appointed successor Trustee.
 
Valuation Date  means any date as of which a valuation of the Trust Fund is made. Valuations of Company Stock shall be made pursuant to Section 10.10. Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary and in the event that a Participant is to receive a distribution from the Plan, the Plan Administrator may in its sole discretion declare a special Valuation Date for that portion of the Plan that is not daily-valued in extraordinary situations to protect the interests of Participants in the Plan or the Participant receiving the distribution. Such extraordinary circumstances include a significant change in economic conditions or market value of the Trust Fund.
 
Vesting Computation Period  means, for purposes of determining Years of Vesting Service, the Plan Year.
 
Year of Eligibility Service  means an Eligibility Computation Period during which an Employee completes at least 1,000 Hours of Service. All eligibility service with the Employer is taken into account.
 
Year of Vesting Service means a Vesting Computation Period during which the Employee completes at least 1,000 Hours of Service.
 
All Years of Vesting Service with the Employer are taken into account. Service with MiLAN Technology Inc. prior to March 25, 2002 and service with Image Systems Corporation prior to March 24, 2004 will be counted when determining Years of Vesting Service.
 
ARTICLE 3
PARTICIPATION
 
Section 3.01       Eligibility to Participate
 
Each Eligible Employee as of the Effective Date who was eligible to participate in the Plan with respect to Employer Contributions immediately prior to the Effective Date shall be a Participant eligible to receive Employer Contributions pursuant to Article 4 on the Effective Date. Each other Eligible Employee who does not become a Participant pursuant to the preceding sentence shall become a Participant eligible to receive Employer Contributions on the applicable Entry Date that occurs once he completes the one (1) Year of Eligibility Service; provided, that he is an Eligible Employee on that date.
 
Section 3.02        Transfers
 
If a change in job classification or a transfer results in an individual no longer qualifying as an Eligible Employee, such Employee shall cease to be a Participant for purposes of Article 4 (or shall not become eligible to become a Participant) as of the effective date of such change of job classification or transfer. Should such Employee again qualify as an Eligible Employee or if an Employee who was not previously an Eligible Employee becomes an Eligible Employee, he shall become a Participant with respect to the contributions for which the eligibility requirements have been satisfied as of the later of the effective date of such subsequent change of status or the date the Employee meets the eligibility requirements of this Article 3.
 
13

 

 

 
Section 3.03        Termination and Rehires
 
If an Employee has a Termination of Employment, such Employee shall cease to be a Participant for purposes of Article 4 (or shall not become eligible to become a Participant) as of his Termination of Employment. An individual who has satisfied the applicable eligibility requirements set forth in Article 3 as of his Termination date, and who is subsequently reemployed by the Company as an Eligible Employee, shall resume or become a Participant immediately upon his rehire date with respect to the contributions for which the eligibility requirements of this Article 3 have been satisfied. An individual who has not so qualified for participation on his Termination date, and who is subsequently reemployed by the Company as an Eligible Employee, shall be eligible to participate as of the later of the effective date of such reemployment or the date the individual meets the eligibility requirements of this Article 3. The determination of whether a rehired Eligible Employee satisfies the requirements of Article 3 shall be made after the application of any applicable break in service rules.
 
Section 3.04        Limitations on Exclusions
 
(a)           Exclusions. Any employee exclusion in the Plan shall not be valid to the extent that such exclusion requires that the maximum number of Nonhighly Compensated Employees with the highest amount of compensation and/or service shall be excluded from participation so that the Plan still meets the coverage requirements of Code section 410(b).
 
(b)           A Participant shall be treated as benefiting under the Plan for any Plan Year during which the Participant received or is deemed to receive an allocation in accordance with Treas. Reg. section 1.410(b)-3(a). Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, no Participant shall earn an allocation hereunder except as provided under the terms of the Plan as in effect on the last day of the Plan Year after giving effect to all retroactive amendments that may be permitted under applicable Internal Revenue Service procedures and other applicable law; including, without limitation, any amendment permitted under Treas. Reg. 1.401(a)(4)-11.
 
Section 3.05        Waiver of Participation
 
An Employee who is otherwise eligible to participate in the Plan may elect to waive such participation in accordance with the following provisions:
 
(a)           Irrevocable Election. An Eligible Employee may make a one-time irrevocable election to waive participation in the Plan. However, the Plan Administrator may in its sole discretion elect not to make this option available to one or more Eligible Employees if the Eligible Employee is not an Highly Compensated Employee and is not likely to become an Highly Compensated Employee and if the Plan Administrator determines that such waiver may cause the Plan for any Plan Year to fail to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Code section 410(b)(1)(B) and (C). The Employee’s election to waive participation in the Plan must be in writing and must be delivered to the Plan Administrator on or before the date the Employee first becomes eligible to participate in the Plan. Notwithstanding the foregoing, however, once the Employee has become a Participant in the Plan, no waiver can be made, except provided in (b) below.
 
14

 

 

 
(b)           Election to Waive Allocation. Notwithstanding paragraph (a) above, and subject to the Top-Heavy Minimum Benefit requirements of Section 12.02, a Participant may agree to forego an allocation of Employer Contributions to his or her Participant’s Account for all or any Plan Years if such Participant is a Highly Compensated Employee for such Plan Year.
 
(c)           Administrative Requirements. The Employee’s election to waive participation or forego an allocation must be in writing and must be delivered to the Plan Administrator on or before the date the Employee first becomes eligible to participate in the Plan in the case of a waiver under Section 3.05(a), and before the Participant is entitled to an allocation to his or her Participant’s Account in the case of foregoing such allocation under Section 3.05(b) for a Plan Year. The Plan Administrator will furnish the form required to make an election under this Section which may include the requirement for consent by the Employee’s spouse.
 
Section 3.06        Procedures for Admission
 
The Plan Administrator shall prescribe such forms and may require such data from Participants as are reasonably required to enroll a Participant in the Plan.
 
ARTICLE 4
CONTRIBUTIONS
 
Section 4.01        Employer Contributions
 
(a)           Amount of Employer Contributions. Subject to the limitations described in Article 6, the Company may, in its sole discretion, make Employer Contributions to the Plan on behalf of each Participant who has completed at least 1,000 Hours of Service during the Plan Year and is employed by the Company on the last day of the Plan Year. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Participant who has a Termination of Employment during the Plan Year due to death, Disability or attainment of Normal Retirement Age shall be eligible to receive an Employer Contribution for such Plan Year regardless of whether such Participant meets any service requirement set forth in this Subsection.
 
(b)           Allocation of Employer Contributions. Employer Contributions shall be allocated to the Employer Contribution Accounts of each Participant eligible to share in such allocations pursuant to Subsection (a) after the end of the Plan Year. Such Contributions shall be allocated in the ratio that such Participant’s Compensation bears to the Compensation of all eligible Participants.
 
(c)           Participant. For purposes of this Section, “Participant” shall mean an Eligible Employee who has met the eligibility requirements of Article 3 with respect to Employer Contributions.
 
15

 

 

 
(d)           Coverage Failures. If the application of the rules described above causes the Plan to fail to meet the minimum coverage requirements of Code section 410(b)(1)(B) (the Plan does not benefit a percentage of Nonhighly Compensated Employees that is at least 70% of the percentage of Highly Compensated Employees who benefit under the Plan) for any Plan Year with respect to Employer Contributions because the Company’s Employer Contributions have not been allocated to a sufficient number or percentage of Participants for such year, then:
 
(1)           The list of Participants eligible to share in the Company’s Employer Contributions for such Plan Year shall be expanded to include the minimum number of Participants who would not otherwise be eligible as are necessary to satisfy the minimum coverage requirements under Code section 410(b)(1)(B). The specific Participants who shall become eligible to share in the Company’s Employer Contribution for such Plan Year pursuant to this Paragraph (1) shall be those Participants who remain in the Company’s employ on the last day of such Plan Year and who have completed the greatest amount of service during the Plan Year.
 
(2)           If, after the application of Paragraph (1) above, the minimum coverage requirements of Code section 410(b)(1)(B) are still not satisfied, then the list of Participants eligible to share in the Company’s Employer Contribution for such Plan Year shall be further expanded to include the minimum number of Participants who do not remain in the Company’s employ on the last day of the Plan Year as are necessary to satisfy such requirements. The specific Participants who shall become eligible to share in the Company’s contribution for such Plan Year pursuant to this Paragraph (2) shall be those Participants who had completed the greatest amount of service during the Plan Year before terminating their employment with the Employer.
 
Section 4.02        Rollover Contributions
 
The Plan shall not accept rollover contributions from any other qualified plan or individual retirement account.
 
Section 4.03        Transfers
 
The Trustee may accept a direct transfer of assets, made without the consent of the affected Employees, from the trustee of any other qualified plan described in Code section 401(a) to the extent permitted by the Code and the regulations and rulings thereunder. In the event assets are transferred to the Plan pursuant to the foregoing sentence, the transferred assets shall be accounted for separately in the Transfer Account of the affected Employees to the extent necessary to preserve a more favorable vesting schedule or any other legally-protected benefits available to such Employees under the transferor plan. The Plan Administrator shall establish a vesting schedule for the Transfer Account; provided that such schedule is not less favorable than the vesting schedule under the transferor plan.
 
Section 4.04        Military Service
 
(a)           In General. Notwithstanding any provision of this Plan to the contrary, contributions, benefits and service credit with respect to qualified military service shall be provided in accordance with Code section 414(u).
 
16

 

 

 
(b)           Death Benefits Under USERRA. Effective January 1, 2007, if a Participant dies while performing qualified military service (as defined in Code section 414(u)), the survivors of the Participant are entitled to any additional benefits (other than benefit accruals relating to the period of qualified military service specified in Subsection (d) below) provided under the Plan as if the Participant had resumed and then terminated employment on account of death pursuant to Code section 401(a)(37), Notice 2010-5 and any superseding guidance.
 
(c)           Differential Military Pay. Effective for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2008, pursuant to Code section 414(u)(12), Notice 2010-5 and any superseding guidance, a Participant receiving differential wage payments (as defined in Code section 3401(h)(2)) shall be treated as an Employee of the Employer making the payment and the differential wage payments shall be treated as Compensation for Employer Contribution allocation purposes under the Plan.
 
(d)           Death or Disability During Qualified Military Service. Pursuant to Code section 414(u)(9), Notice 2010-5 and any superseding guidance, a Participant that dies or becomes disabled while performing qualified military service (as defined in Code section 414(u)) will be treated as if he had been employed by the Company on the day preceding death or disability and terminated employment on the day of death or disability and receive benefit accruals related to the period of qualified military service as provided under Code section 414(u)(8), except that all Participants eligible for benefits under the Plan by reason of this Section shall be provided benefits on reasonably equivalent terms.
 
Section 4.05        Multiple Employer Plan
 
If the Employees of more than one employer within the meaning of Code section 413(c) are covered under the Plan, the provisions of such section shall apply to the Plan. The Plan Administrator may restrict the allocation of any forfeitures arising hereunder to the entity for which the applicable Participant is or was employed.
 
ARTICLE 5
SPECIAL ESOP PROVISIONS
 
Section 5.01        ESOP Contributions
 
(a)           Amount of ESOP Contributions. The Company shall make a contribution to the Plan in cash sufficient to pay any currently maturing obligations on an Exempt Loan (to the extent that such obligations will not be satisfied pursuant to the terms of Article 4 by means of contributions paid to ESOP Accounts or by use of dividends pursuant to Article 10). Such contributions shall be applied, as the Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee, to repay any outstanding Exempt Loan in accordance with its terms. The Company may make additional contributions in cash or Company Stock.
 
(b)           Allocation of ESOP Contributions. ESOP Contributions made in the form of Company Stock and Company Stock transferred to the Released and Unallocated Account shall be allocated to the ESOP Accounts pursuant to the terms of Article 4. The shares so allocated shall have a fair market value as of the allocation date equal to the amount of the contributions to which the Participant is entitled.
 
17

 

 

 
Section 5.02        Exempt Loan
 
(a)           Authorization - Use. The Board may direct the Trustee to borrow money from a Disqualified Person, or another source which is guaranteed by a Disqualified Person the proceeds of which are used within a reasonable time to: (1) acquire Company Stock, (2) repay such Exempt Loan, or (3) repay a prior Exempt Loan pursuant to applicable regulations.
 
(b)           Terms of Exempt Loan Agreements. All Exempt Loans shall satisfy the following requirements:
 
(1)           The loan shall be primarily for the benefit of Participants and their Beneficiaries.
 
(2)           The loan shall be for a specified term, shall bear no more than a reasonable rate of interest, and shall not be payable on demand except in the event of default.
 
(3)           The collateral pledged by the Trustee shall consist only of the Company Stock purchased with the borrowed funds, or Company Stock that was pledged as collateral in connection with a prior Exempt Loan that was repaid with the proceeds of the current Exempt Loan.
 
(4)           Under the terms of the loan agreement, the lender shall have no recourse against the Trust, or any of its assets, except with respect to the collateral and contributions (other than contributions of Company Stock) by the Company that are made to satisfy the Trustee’s obligations under the loan agreement and earnings attributable to such collateral and such contributions.
 
(5)           The payments made on the Exempt Loan during a Plan Year shall not exceed an amount equal to the sum of such contributions and earnings received during or prior to the year less such payments on the Exempt Loan in prior years. Such contributions and earnings must be accounted for separately in the books of account of the Plan until the Exempt Loan is repaid.
 
(6)           In the event of default, the value of Plan assets transferred in satisfaction of the Exempt Loan shall not exceed the amount of default; moreover, if the lender is a Disqualified Person, the loan agreement shall provide for a transfer of Plan assets upon default only upon and to the extent of the failure of the Plan to meet the payment schedule of the loan.
 
Section 5.03        Release of Company Stock
 
(a)           Company Stock purchased with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan shall be held in the Suspense Account as the collateral for that Exempt Loan. Such Company Stock shall be released from the Suspense Account, and transferred to the Released and Unallocated Account, on a pro-rata basis according to the amount of the payment on the Exempt Loan determined under one of the following two alternative formulas specified in Subsections (a)(1) and (a)(2) in the discretion of the Plan Administrator and in accordance with the terms of the Exempt Loan.
 
18

 

 

 
(1)           For each payment during the duration of the Exempt Loan, the number of shares of Company Stock released and transferred to the Released and Unallocated Account shall equal the number of such shares held in the Suspense Account immediately before release for the current payment period multiplied by a fraction. The numerator of the fraction is the amount of principal and interest paid for the payment period, and the denominator of the fraction is the sum of the numerator plus the remaining principal and interest to be paid for all future payments. The number of future payments under the Exempt Loan must be definitely ascertainable and must be determined without taking into account any possible extensions or renewal periods. If the interest rate under the Exempt Loan is variable, the interest to be paid in future payment periods must be computed by using the interest rate applicable as of the end of the immediately preceding payment period. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the Exempt Loan is repaid with the proceeds of a subsequent Exempt Loan, such repayment shall not operate to release all of the Company Stock in the Suspense Account; rather, such release shall be effected pursuant to the foregoing provisions of this subsection on the basis of payments of principal and interest on such substitute loan; or
 
(2)           For each payment during the duration of the Exempt Loan, the number of shares of Company Stock released and transferred to the Released and Unallocated Account is determined solely with reference to the principal payment of the Exempt Loan. Company Stock in the Suspense Account may be released in accordance with this subsection (2) only if the following three conditions are met:
 
(i)           The Exempt Loan provides for annual payments of principal and interest at a cumulative rate that is not less rapid at any time than level annual payments of such amounts for ten years;
 
(ii)          The interest portion of any payment is disregarded for purposes of determining the number of shares released only to the extent it would be treated as interest under standard loan amortization tables; and
 
(iii)         If the Exempt Loan is renewed, extended or refinanced, the sum of the expired duration of the Exempt Loan and the renewal period, the extension period or the duration of a new Exempt Loan does not exceed ten years.
 
(b)           More than One Exempt Loan. If at any time there is more than one Exempt Loan outstanding, separate accounts shall be established under the Suspense Account and the Released and Unallocated Account for each Exempt Loan. Each Exempt Loan for which a separate account is maintained shall be treated separately for purposes of Subsection (a) governing the release of shares from the Suspense Account.
 
(c)           Treasury Regulations. It is intended that the provisions of this section be applied and construed in a manner consistent with the requirements and provisions of Treas. Reg. section 54.4975-7(b)(8) and any successor regulation thereto. If the Suspense Account holds more than one class of Company Stock, such stock shall be allocated and distributed in substantially the same proportion of each such class of Company Stock when distributed under Article 8, pursuant to Treas. Reg. 54.4975-11(f)(2).
 
19

 

 

 
Section 5.04        Prohibited Allocation
 
(a)           Section 1042. Notwithstanding any provision in this Plan to the contrary, if shares of Company Stock (in a C-Corporation only) are sold to the Plan by a shareholder in a transaction for which special tax treatment is elected by such shareholder (or his representative) pursuant to Code section 1042, no assets attributable to such Company Stock may be allocated to the ESOP Accounts of: (i) the shareholder, and any person who is related to such shareholder (within the meaning of Code section 267(b)), during the nonallocation period except that lineal descendants of such shareholder may receive allocations so long as no more than 5% of the aggregate amount of all Company Stock sold by such shareholder in a transaction to which Code section 1042 applies is allocated to such lineal descendants of such shareholder; and (ii) any other person who owns (after application of Code section 318(a)) more than 25 percent in value of any class of outstanding securities of the Employer.
 
For purposes of this Subsection, “nonallocation period” means the period beginning on the date of a sale of Company Stock to the Plan financed with an Exempt Loan and ending on the later of ten years after the date of such sale or the date of the allocation attributable to the final payment on the Exempt Loan incurred with respect to the sale.
 
(b)           Subchapter S Corporations.
 
(1)           In General. Notwithstanding any provision in this Plan to the contrary, if the Company Stock is issued by an S Corporation, no portion of the assets attributable to (or allocable in lieu of) Company Stock may, during a nonallocation year, accrue (or be allocated directly or indirectly under any Employer plan qualified under Code section 401(a)) for the benefit of any S Corporation disqualified person. This Subsection (b) shall be effective only to the extent that Company Stock consists of shares in an S Corporation. However, in the case of: (i) an employee stock ownership plan established after March 14, 2001 (within the meaning of Internal Revenue Service Revenue Ruling 2003-6); or (ii) an employee stock ownership plan established on or before March 14, 2001 where the employer securities held by the Plan consist of stock in a corporation that is not an S Corporation on such date, this Subsection (b) shall be effective for Plan Years ending after March 14, 2001.
 
(2)           Prevention of Nonallocation Year. In the absence of a Board resolution to otherwise prevent a nonallocation year, the Plan Administrator shall transfer the S Corporation securities held for the Participant under the ESOP into a separate portion of the Plan that is not an ESOP (as provided in Section 5.05 and as permitted under Treas. Reg. section 54.4975-11(a)(5)) or to another qualified plan of the Employer that is not an ESOP. Any such transfer must be effectuated by an affirmative action taken no later than the date of the transfer, and all subsequent actions (including benefit statements) generally must be consistent with the transfer having occurred on that date.
 
20

 

 

 
(3)           Definitions and Other Rules. The following definitions and other rules apply for purposes of this Subsection (b):
 
(A)         “Nonallocation Year” means any Plan Year if, at any time during such Plan Year: (i) the Plan holds employer securities consisting of stock in an S Corporation; and (ii) disqualified persons own at least 50 percent of the number of shares of stock in the S Corporation. For purposes of this definition, the rules of Code section 318(a) shall apply for purposes of determining ownership, except that in applying Code section 318(a)(1), the members of an individual’s family shall include members of the family defined in Subsection (3)(D) herein pursuant to Code section 409(p)(4)(D) and Code section 318(a)(4) regarding options shall not apply. Notwithstanding the employee trust exception in Code section 318(a)(2)(B)(i), an individual shall be treated as owning deemed-owned shares of the individual. Solely for purposes of applying Code section 409(p)(5) (regarding the treatment of synthetic equity), this definition of a nonallocation year shall be applied after the attribution rules of Section 5.04(b)(3)(E)(1) and Code section 409(p)(5) have been applied.
 
(B)          “Disqualified Person” means any person if: (i) the aggregate number of deemed-owned shares of such person and the members of such person’s family is at least 20 percent of the number of deemed-owned shares of stock in the S corporation, or (ii) in the case of a person not described in clause (i), the number of deemed-owned shares of such person is at least 10 percent of the number of deemed-owned shares of stock in such corporation (a “deemed 10% shareholder”). For purposes of clause (i) of the preceding sentence, any member of such person’s family with deemed-owned shares shall be treated as a disqualified person if not otherwise treated as a disqualified person under this Subsection (B).
 
(C)          “Deemed-Owned Shares” means, with respect to any person: (i) the stock in the S Corporation constituting employer securities of an employee stock ownership plan which is allocated to such person under the Plan, and; (ii) such person’s share of the stock in such corporation which is held by the Plan but which is not allocated under the Plan to Participants. For purposes of clause (ii) of the preceding sentence, a person’s share of unallocated S corporation stock held by the Plan is the amount of the unallocated stock which would be allocated to such person if the unallocated stock were allocated to all Participants in the same proportions as the most recent stock allocation under the Plan.
 
(D)         “Member of the Family” means, with respect to any individual: (i) the spouse of the individual; (ii) an ancestor or lineal descendant of the individual or the individual’s spouse; (iii) a brother or sister of the individual or the individual’s spouse and any lineal descendant of the brother or sister; and (iv) the spouse of any individual described in clause (ii) or (iii). A spouse of an individual who is legally separated from such individual under a decree of divorce or separate maintenance shall not be treated as such individual’s spouse for purposes of this Subsection (D).
 
(E)          Treatment of Synthetic Equity.
 
(1)           In General. For purposes of Subsections (3)(A) and (3)(B), in the case of a person who owns synthetic equity in the S Corporation, except to the extent provided in regulations, the shares of stock in such corporation on which such synthetic equity is based shall be treated as outstanding stock in such corporation and deemed-owned shares of such person if such treatment of synthetic equity of one or more such persons results in (i) the treatment of any person as a disqualified person, or (ii) the treatment of any year as a nonallocation year. For purposes of this Subsection, synthetic equity shall be treated as owned by a person in the same manner as stock is treated as owned by a person under the rules of Code section 318(a)(2) and (3). If, without regard to this Subsection, a person is treated as a disqualified person or a year is treated as a nonallocation year, this Subsection shall not be construed to result in the person or year not being so treated.
 
21

 

 

 
(2)           “Synthetic Equity” means any stock option, warrant, restricted stock, deferred issuance stock right, or similar interest or right that gives the holder the right to acquire or receive stock of the S Corporation in the future. Except to the extent provided in regulations, synthetic equity also includes a stock appreciation right, phantom stock unit, or similar right to a future cash payment based on the value of such stock or appreciation in such value. Synthetic Equity also includes any of the following with respect to an S Corporation or a related entity: any remuneration to which Code section 404(a)(5) applies; remuneration for which a deduction would be permitted under Code section 404(a)(5) if separate accounts were maintained; any right to receive property, as defined in Reg. §1.83-3(e) (including a payment to a trust described in Code section 402(b) or to an annuity described in Code section 403(c)) in a future year for the performance of services; any transfer of property in connection with the performance of services to which Code section 83 applies to the extent that the property is not substantially vested within the meaning of Reg. §1.83-3(i) by the end of the plan year in which transferred; and a split-dollar life insurance arrangement under Reg. §1.61-22(b) entered into in connection with the performance of services (other than one under which, at all times, the only economic benefit that will be provided under the arrangement is current life insurance protection as described in §1.61-22(d)(3)). Synthetic Equity also includes any other remuneration for services under a plan, method, or arrangement deferring the receipt of compensation to a date that is after the 15th day of the 3rd calendar month after the end of the entity’s taxable year in which the related services are rendered. However, Synthetic Equity does not include benefits under a plan that is an eligible retirement plan within the meaning of section Code 402(c)(8)(B).
 
For purposes of applying the above paragraph, Synthetic Equity does not include any interest described in such paragraph to the extent that (i) the interest is nonqualified deferred compensation (within the meaning of Code section 3121(v)(2)) that was outstanding on December 17, 2004; (ii) the interest is an amount that was taken into account (within the meaning of Reg. §31.3121(v)(2)-1(d)) prior to January 1, 2005, for purposes of taxation under chapter 21 of the Code (or income attributable thereto); and (iii) the interest was held before the first date on which the Plan acquires any employer securities.
 
(3)           Determination of Other Synthetic Equity. This Subsection (3) shall apply with regard to other synthetic equity described in Treas. Reg. section 1.409(p)-1(f)(4)(iii)(A) or superseding guidance. The Plan Administrator shall use the first day of the Plan Year as the annual determination date and the number of shares of synthetic equity owned shall be treated as owned for the period from a determination date through the date immediately preceding the next following determination date pursuant to Treas. Reg. section 1.409(p)-1(f)(4)(iii)(B). The Plan Administrator shall use triannual recalculations specified in Treas. Reg. section 1.409(p)-1(f)(4)(iii)(C). Such triannual recalculations may be modified as provided in Treas. Reg. section 1.409(p)-1(f)(4)(iii)(C)(3).
 
22

 

 

 
(F)          “Impermissible Allocation” means an allocation that occurs during a nonallocation year to the extent that a contribution or other annual addition (within the meaning of Code section 415(c)(2)) is made with respect to the account of a disqualified person, or the disqualified person otherwise accrues additional benefits, directly or indirectly under the Plan or any other plan of the employer qualified under Code section 401(a) (including a release and allocation of assets from a suspense account, as described at Treas. Reg. section 54.4975-11(c) and (d)) that, for the nonallocation year, would have been added to the account of the disqualified person under the Plan and invested in employer securities consisting of stock in an S corporation owned by the Plan but for a provision in the Plan that precludes such addition to the account of the disqualified person, and investment in employer securities during a nonallocation year.
 
(G)          “Impermissible Accrual” means an accrual to the extent that employer securities consisting of stock in an S corporation owned by the Plan and any assets attributable thereto are held under the Plan for the benefit of a disqualified person during a nonallocation year. For this purpose, assets attributable to stock in an S corporation owned by the Plan include any distributions, within the meaning of Code section 1368, made on S corporation stock held in a disqualified person’s account in the Plan (including earnings thereon), plus any proceeds from the sale of S corporation securities held for a disqualified person’s account in the Plan (including any earnings thereon). Thus, in the event of a nonallocation year, all S corporation shares and all other Plan assets attributable to S corporation stock, including distributions, sales proceeds, and earnings on either distributions or proceeds, held for the account of such disqualified person in the Plan during that year are an impermissible accrual for the benefit of that person, whether attributable to contributions in the current year or in prior years.
 
Section 5.05        Non-ESOP Portion of Plan
 
(a)           Non-ESOP Portion. Assets held under the Plan in accordance with this Section are held under a portion of the Plan that is not an employee stock ownership plan (ESOP), within the meaning of Code section 4975(e)(7). Amounts held in the portion of the Plan that is not an ESOP (the Non-ESOP Portion) shall be held in Accounts that are separate from the Accounts for the amounts held in the remainder of the Plan (the ESOP Portion). Any statements provided to Participants and/or Beneficiaries to show their interest in the Plan shall separately identify the amounts held in each such portion. Except as specifically set forth in this Section, all of the terms of the Plan apply to any amount held under the Non-ESOP Portion of the Plan in the same manner and to the same extent as an amount held under the ESOP Portion of the Plan.
 
(b)           Transfers from ESOP Portion to Non-ESOP Portion of Plan.
 
(1)           Amount to be Transferred. In the case of any event that the Plan Administrator determines would otherwise cause a nonallocation year (as defined in Section 5.04(b)) to occur (referred herein as a “nonallocation event”), shares of employer stock held under the Plan before the date of the nonallocation event shall be transferred from the ESOP Portion of the Plan to the Non-ESOP Portion of the Plan as provided in Subsection (b)(2). Events that may cause a nonallocation year include, but are not limited to, a contribution to the Plan in the form of shares of employer stock, a distribution from the Plan in the form of shares of employer stock, a change of investment within a Plan account of a disqualified person (as defined in Section 5.04(b)) that alters the number of shares of employer stock held in the account of the disqualified person, or the issuance by the employer of synthetic equity as defined by Code section 409(p)(6)(C) and Treas. Reg. section 1.409(p)-1(f). A nonallocation event occurs only if (i) the total number of shares of employer stock that, held in the ESOP account of those Participants who are or who would be disqualified persons after taking into account the Participant’s synthetic equity and the nonallocation event exceeds (ii) the number of shares of employer stock equal to 49.9% of the total number of shares of employer stock outstanding after taking the nonallocation event into account (causing a nonallocation year to occur). The amount transferred under this Subsection shall be the amount that the Plan Administrator determines to be the minimum amount that is necessary to ensure that a nonallocation year does not occur, but in no event is the amount so transferred to be less than the excess of (i) over (ii). The Plan Administrator shall take steps to ensure that all actions necessary to implement the transfer are taken before the nonallocation event occurs.
 
23

 

 

 
(2)           Ordering Rules.
 
(A)         Except as provided for in Subsection (b)(2)(B), at the date of the transfer, the total number of shares transferred, as provided for in Subsection (b)(1), shall be charged against the accounts of Participants who are disqualified persons (i) by first reducing the ESOP account of the Participant who is a disqualified person whose account has the largest number of shares (with the addition of synthetic equity shares) and (ii) thereafter by reducing the ESOP accounts of each succeeding Participant who is a disqualified person who has the largest number of shares in his or her account (with the addition of synthetic equity shares). Immediately following the transfer, the number of transferred shares charged against any Participant’s account in the ESOP Portion of the Plan shall be credited to an account established for that Participant in the Non-ESOP Portion of the Plan.
 
(B)          Notwithstanding Subsection (b)(2)(A), the number of shares transferred shall be charged against the accounts of Participants who are disqualified persons (i) by first reducing the account of the Participant with the fewest shares (including synthetic equity shares) who is a disqualified person and who is a Highly Compensated Employee to cause the Participant not to be a disqualified person, and (ii) thereafter reducing the account of each other Participant who is a disqualified person and a Highly Compensated Employee, in the order of who has the fewest ESOP shares (including synthetic equity shares). A transfer under this Subsection (b)(2)(B) only applies to the extent that the transfer results in fewer shares being transferred than in a transfer under Subsection (b)(2)(A).
 
(3)           Tie Breaker.
 
(A)         If two or more Participants described in Subsection (b)(2) have the same number of shares, the account of the Participant with the longest service shall be reduced first.
 
(B)          Beneficiaries of the Plan are treated as Plan Participants for purposes of this Section.
 
24

 

 

 
(C)          Income Taxes. If the Trust owes income taxes as a result of unrelated business taxable income under Code section 512(e) with respect to shares of employer stock held in the Non-ESOP Portion of the Plan, the income tax payments made by the Trustee shall be charged against the accounts of each Participant or Beneficiary who has an account in the Non-ESOP Portion of the Plan in proportion to the ratio of the shares of employer stock in such Participant’s or Beneficiary’s account in the non-ESOP Portion of the Plan to the total shares of employer stock in the non-ESOP Portion of the Plan. The Employer shall purchase shares of employer stock from the Trustee with cash (based on the fair market value of the shares so purchased) from each such account to the extent cash is not otherwise available to make the income tax payments from the Participant’s or Beneficiary’s ESOP accounts or his or her other defined contribution plan accounts.
 
ARTICLE 6
LIMITATIONS ON CONTRIBUTIONS
 
Section 6.01        Maximum Amount of Annual Additions
 
(a)           General Rule.
 
(1)           One Plan. If the Participant does not participate in, and has never participated in another qualified plan maintained by the Employer or a welfare benefit fund, as defined in Code section 419(e) maintained by the Employer, or an individual medical account, as defined in Code section 415(l)(2), maintained by the Employer, or a simplified employee pension, as defined in Code section 408(k), maintained by the Employer, which provides an Annual Addition, the amount of Annual Additions which may be credited to the Participant’s Account for any Limitation Year will not exceed the lesser of the maximum permissible amount specified in Section 6.01(b) or any other limitation contained in this Plan. If the Employer contribution that would otherwise be contributed or allocated to the Participant’s Account would cause the Annual Additions for the Limitation Year to exceed such maximum permissible amount, the amount contributed or allocated will be reduced so that the Annual Additions for the Limitation Year will equal the maximum permissible amount.
 
(2)           Multiple Plans. This Subsection 6.01(a)(2) applies if, in addition to this Plan, the Participant is covered under another qualified defined contribution plan maintained by the Employer, a welfare benefit fund maintained by the Employer, an individual medical account maintained by the Employer, or a simplified employee pension maintained by the Employer, that provides an Annual Addition during any Limitation Year. The Annual Additions which may be credited to a Participant’s Account under this Plan for any such Limitation Year will not exceed the maximum permissible amount specified in Section 6.01(b) reduced by the Annual Additions credited to a Participant’s account under the other qualified defined contribution plans, welfare benefit funds, individual medical accounts, and simplified employee pensions for the same Limitation Year.
 
(b)           Maximum Permissible Amount. For any Limitation Year, the maximum permissible amount is the lesser of:
 
(1)           $40,000, as adjusted for increases in the cost-of-living under Code section 415(d); or
 
25

 

 

 
(2)           100 percent of the Participant’s Testing Compensation for the Limitation Year. The compensation limit referred to in this Subsection (b)(2) shall not apply to any contribution for medical benefits after severance from employment which is otherwise treated as an Annual Addition. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, Testing Compensation for purposes of Section 6.01 for a Participant in a defined contribution plan who is permanently and totally disabled (as defined in Code section 22(e)(3)) is the compensation such Participant would have received for the Limitation Year if the Participant had been paid at the rate of compensation paid immediately before becoming permanently and totally disabled.
 
Prior to determining the Participant’s actual Testing Compensation for the Limitation Year, the Employer may determine the maximum permissible amount for a Participant on the basis of a reasonable estimation of the Participant’s Testing Compensation for the Limitation Year, uniformly determined for all Participants similarly situated. As soon as is administratively feasible after the end of the Limitation Year, the maximum permissible amount for the Limitation Year will be determined on the basis of the Participant’s actual Testing Compensation for the Limitation Year.
 
(c)           Correction of Excess. If there is an allocation in excess of the Maximum Permissible Amount, the Plan Administrator shall correct such excess pursuant to the procedures outlined under EPCRS as described in Rev. Proc. 2013-12 and any superseding guidance.
 
(d)           Special ESOP Rule.
 
(1)           General Rule. In the case of an applicable plan that meets the requirements of Subsection (d)(2) below, the limitations imposed by this Section do not apply to: (i) forfeitures of employer securities (within the meaning of Code section 409(l)) if such securities were acquired with the proceeds of a loan (as described in Code section 404(a)(9)(A)); or (ii) employer contributions which are deductible under Code section 404(a)(9)(B) and charged against the Participant’s Account.
 
(2)           Applicable Plan. An employee stock ownership plan as described in Code section 4975(e)(7) meets the requirements of this Subsection if no more than one-third of the employer contributions for the Limitation Year that are deductible under Code section 404(a)(9) are allocated to Highly Compensated Employees. This Subsection (d) shall not apply if the Company Stock is issued by an S Corporation.
 
(e)           Stock Value Declines Below Basis. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the amount of Company contributions attributable to ESOP Contributions that is considered an Annual Addition for any Limitation Year shall in no event be greater than the lesser of (i) the amount of the payment of principal and interest on the Acquisition Loan or (ii) the fair market value of shares released from the Suspense Account on account of the repayment and allocated to Participants.
 
26

 

 

 
ARTICLE 7
VESTING
 
Section 7.01        Employer Contributions
 
Effective for a Participant who receives an allocation of Employer Contributions for the Plan Year beginning January 1, 2007 or any subsequent Plan Year, such Participant shall have a vested and nonforfeitable interest in Employer Contributions allocated to the Participant’s account, and earnings thereon, based on the Participant’s Years of Vesting Service in accordance with the following schedule:
 
   
Vesting
 
Years of Vesting Service
 
Percentage
 
       
Less than Two Years
    0%  
Two Years but less than Three Years
    20%  
Three Years but less than Four Years
    40%  
Four Years but less than Five Years
    60%  
Five Years but less than Six Years
    80%  
Six or More Years
    100%  
 
Participants whose Termination of Employment occurred on or before December 31, 2006 shall be subject to the vesting schedule in effect when the Termination of Employment occurred. A Participant whose Termination of Employment occurs during the Plan Year beginning January 1, 2007, but who is not eligible for an allocation of Employer Contributions for said Plan Year, shall be subject to the vesting schedule in effect prior to January 1, 2007.
 
Notwithstanding the above, if there was an Exempt Loan outstanding on September 26, 2005, the vesting schedule above will not apply to any Plan Year beginning before the earlier of the date on which the Exempt Loan (i) is fully repaid, or (ii) was, as of September 26, 2005, scheduled to be fully repaid.
 
Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Participant will become fully (100%) vested upon his attainment of Normal Retirement Age while an Employee, his death while an Employee and his suffering a Disability while an Employee. A Participant shall also become fully (100%) vested upon a Change in Control of the Plan Sponsor.  For this purpose, “Change in Control” of the Plan Sponsor shall mean a change in control which would be required to be reported in response to Item 5(f) on Schedule 14A of Regulation 14A promulgated under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”), whether or not the Plan Sponsor is then subject to such reporting requirement and which does not arise from a transaction or series of transactions authorized, recommended or approved by formal action taken by the Board of Directors, as defined herein, including, without limitation, if any “person” (as such term is sued in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Exchange Act) becomes a “beneficial owner” (as defined in Rule 13(d)3 under the Exchange Act), directly or indirectly, of securities of the Employer representing 20% or more of the combined voting power of the Employer’s then-outstanding securities, or if there ceases to be a majority of the Board of Directors. For purposes of this paragraph, “Board of Directors” shall mean:  (A) individuals who on the effective date hereof, constituted the Board of the Employer; and (B) any new director who subsequently was elected or nominated for election by a majority of the directors who held such office immediately prior to a Change in Control.
 
27

 

 

 
A Participant’s Transfer Account, if any, shall remain subject to the vesting schedule that applied to the Account immediately prior to the transfer.
 
Section 7.02        Forfeitures
 
(a)           Participants Receiving a Distribution. A Participant who receives a distribution of the value of the entire vested portion of his Account shall forfeit the nonvested portion of such Account as soon as administratively feasible after such distribution; but no later than the end of the Plan Year following the date of such distribution. For purposes of this Section, if the value of a Participant’s vested Account balance is zero upon Termination, the Participant shall be deemed to have received a distribution of such vested Account. If the Participant elects to the extent permitted by Article 8 to have distributed less than the entire vested portion of the Account balance derived from Employer contributions, the part of the nonvested portion that will be treated as a forfeiture is the total nonvested portion multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the amount of the distribution attributable to Employer contributions and the denominator of which is the total value of the vested Employer-derived Account balance.
 
(b)           Participants Not Receiving a Distribution. The nonvested portion of the Account balance of a Participant who has a Termination of Employment and does not receive a complete distribution of the vested portion of his Account shall be forfeited as soon as administratively feasible after the date he incurs five consecutive One-Year Breaks in Service; but no later than the end of the Plan Year following the date of such break in service.
 
(c)           Reemployment.
 
(1)           Before Five One-Year Breaks. If a Participant receives or is deemed to receive a distribution pursuant to this Section and the Participant resumes employment covered under this Plan, the Participant’s Employer-derived Account balance will be restored to the amount on the date of distribution if the Participant repays to the Plan the full amount of the distribution attributable to Employer contributions before the earlier of 5 years after the first date on which the Participant is subsequently reemployed by the Employer, or the date the Participant incurs 5 consecutive One-Year Breaks in Service following the date of the distribution. If a zero-vested Participant is deemed to receive a distribution pursuant to this Section, and the Participant resumes employment covered under this Plan before the date the Participant incurs 5 consecutive One-Year Breaks in Service, upon the reemployment of such Participant, the Employer-derived Account balance of the Participant will be restored to the amount on the date of such deemed distribution. Forfeitures that are restored pursuant to the foregoing shall be accomplished by an allocation of forfeitures, or if such forfeitures are insufficient, by a special Company contribution.
 
(2)           After Five One-Year Breaks. If a Participant resumes employment as an Eligible Employee after forfeiting the nonvested portion of his Account balance after 5 consecutive One-Year Breaks in Service and is not fully vested upon reemployment, the Participant’s Account balance attributable to his pre-break service shall be kept separate from that portion of his Account balance attributable to his post-break service until such time as his post-break Account balance becomes fully vested.
 
28

 

 

 
(d)           Disposition of Forfeitures. Amounts forfeited from a Participant’s Account under this Section shall be used to restore forfeitures, allocated as an additional Company contribution pursuant to Article 4 or used to pay reasonable Plan expenses.
 
(e)           Company Stock Fund. The portion of a Participant’s Account invested in Investment Funds other than the Company Stock Fund shall be forfeited before that portion of the Account invested in the Company Stock Fund.
 
(f)           Vesting Following In-Service Withdrawals or Payment in Installments. If a distribution is made at a time when a Participant has a nonforfeitable right to less than 100 percent of his Account derived from Employer contributions and the Participant may increase the nonforfeitable percentage in the Account:
 
(1)           A separate account will be established for the Participant’s interest in the Plan as of the time of the distribution, and
 
(2)           At any relevant time the Participant’s nonforfeitable portion of the separate account will be equal to an amount (“X”) determined by the formula:
 
X = P(AB + (R x D)) - (R x D)
 
For purposes of applying the formula: P is the nonforfeitable percentage at the relevant time; AB is the Account balance at the relevant time; D is the amount of the distribution; and R is the ratio of the Account balance at the relevant time to the Account balance after distribution.
 
ARTICLE 8
DISTRIBUTIONS
 
Section 8.01        Commencement of Distributions
 
(a)           Normal Retirement. A Participant, upon attainment of Normal Retirement Age, shall be entitled to retire and to receive his Account as his benefit hereunder pursuant to Section 8.02.
 
(b)           Late Retirement. If a Participant continues in the employ of the Company beyond his Normal Retirement Age, his participation under the Plan shall continue, and his benefits under the Plan shall commence following his actual Termination of Employment pursuant to Section 8.02.
 
(c)           Disability Retirement. If a Participant becomes Disabled, he shall become entitled to receive his vested Account pursuant to Section 8.02 following the date he has a Termination of Employment.
 
29

 

 

 
(d)           Death. If a Participant dies, either before or after his Termination of Employment, his Beneficiary designated pursuant to Section 8.04 shall become entitled to receive the Participant’s vested Account pursuant to Section 8.02.
 
(e)           Termination of Employment. A Participant shall become entitled to receive his vested Account pursuant to Section 8.02 following the date he has a Termination of Employment.
 
Section 8.02        Timing and Form of Distributions
 
(a)           ESOP and Other Accounts.
 
(1)           Timing. If a Participant’s Accounts become distributable pursuant to Section 8.01, payment of his vested Accounts shall be made or commence as of a Valuation Date following the Participant’s Termination of Employment, as elected by the distributee. Distribution shall not occur if the Participant is reemployed by the Company before distribution is made or commenced.
 
(2)           Form of Payments.  Distribution of a Participant’s Accounts shall be made to a Participant under one of the following modes of settlement which shall be selected by the Participant, or the Participant’s designated Beneficiary if the Participant dies before commencement of benefits:
 
(i)           by payment in a single lump sum; or
 
(ii)           by payment in the form of annual or more frequent installments as may be conveniently determined. Installments shall be payable over a period that does not exceed the life expectancy of the Participant or the joint life expectancy of the Participant and the Participant’s Beneficiary, subject to the Plan Administrator setting limitations on the number of years over which benefits may be paid in the event installments would be less than $100 per month. In addition, each installment shall not be less than the amount required to be distributed under Section 8.05.
 
(3)           Delayed Distribution.  Notwithstanding the foregoing and at the election of the Plan Administrator, distribution of the ESOP Contribution Account (other than for reasons of attainment of Normal or Late Retirement Age, Disability or death) need not commence until the close of the Plan Year in which the Exempt Loan is repaid in full; provided that the proceeds of the Exempt Loan were not used to acquire Company Stock issued by an S Corporation.
 
(4)           Any amendment or exercise of employer discretion regarding revisions of optional forms of benefit shall be subject to the requirements of Treas. Reg. section 1.411(d)-4 Q&A-2(d).
 
(b)           Distribution on Account of Death.
 
(1)           Before Distribution Has Begun. If the Participant dies before distribution of his Account begins, distribution of the Participant’s entire Account shall be completed by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died; provided, however, that if the Beneficiary is the Participant’s surviving spouse, the date distributions are required to begin shall not be earlier than the later of (i) December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died and (ii) December 31 of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained age 70½.
 
30

 

 

 
(2)           After Distribution has Begun.  If the Participant dies after distribution of his Account has begun, the remaining portion of such Account will continue to be distributed at least as rapidly as the method of distribution being used prior to the Participant’s death.  If the Participant’s Account was being distributed in installments at the time of his death, the Beneficiary may elect to receive the Participant’s remaining vested Account balance in a lump sum distribution.
 
(3)           The Beneficiary shall provide the Plan Administrator with the death notice or other sufficient documentation before any payments are made pursuant to this Subsection.
 
(c)           Special Rules Relating to ESOP Accounts.
 
(1)           In General. Unless a Participant elects to receive his distribution in cash, distribution of a Participant’s vested ESOP Account shall be made in whole shares of Company Stock, with any fractional shares paid in cash. Shares of Company Stock distributed may include such legend restrictions on transferability as the Company may reasonably require to ensure compliance with applicable federal and state securities laws. Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary: (i) a Participant shall not have the right to receive Company Stock with respect to the portion of the Participant’s Account that has been reinvested pursuant to Section 10.02(b), and (ii) if the Plan is an applicable plan (as defined below) a distribution from the Company Stock Fund shall either be made in cash or in Company Stock with a requirement to sell the Company Stock to either the Company or the Plan. If pursuant to the foregoing a Participant elects to receive any portion of his ESOP Account in the form of Company Stock that is invested in Investment Funds other than the Company Stock Fund, the Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee to liquidate such other Investment Funds and purchase whole shares Company Stock with the proceeds. In the event that there is not enough Company Stock available for purchase, the Participant may elect to: (i) receive Company Stock to the extent available and receive the balance in cash, (ii) receive Company Stock to the extent available and receive the balance in Company Stock at a later date when such stock becomes available, or (iii) defer distribution until such Company Stock becomes available.
 
(2)           Applicable Plans. An applicable plan is a plan that is established and maintained by: (i) an employer whose charter or bylaws restrict the ownership of substantially all outstanding employer securities to employees or to a trust described in Code section 401(a), (ii) an S Corporation, or (iii) a bank (as defined in Code section 581) which is prohibited by law from redeeming or purchasing its own securities.
 
(3)           Put Option. If the Company Stock is not readily tradable on an established market (within the meaning of IRS Notice 2011-19 for Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2012 or such later date provided in such Notice) and Company Stock may be distributed to Participants pursuant to Subsection (d)(2), each distributee has a right to require that the Company repurchase Company Stock under a fair valuation formula. Such put option shall be enforceable by the Participant for a period of at least 60 days following the date of distribution of Company Stock and, if the put option is not exercised within such 60-day period, for an additional period of at least 60 days in the following Plan Year (as provided in applicable Treasury regulations). The Company may permit the Trustee to purchase any shares covered by the put option directly from the Participant. The put option shall be mandatory upon distribution of Company Stock if the Company is an S Corporation.
 
31

 

 

 
(A)           Payment Requirement for Total Distribution. If the Company is required to repurchase Company Stock that is distributed to the Participant as part of a total distribution, the Company may make payments in substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) over a period beginning not later than 30 days after the exercise of the put option and not exceeding 5 years, provided that there is adequate security provided and reasonable interest paid on the unpaid amounts.  For purposes of this paragraph, the term “total distribution” means the distribution within one taxable year to the recipient of the balance to the credit of the recipient’s account.
 
(B)           Payment Requirement for Installment Distributions.  If the Company is required to repurchase Company Stock as part of an installment distribution, payment shall made not later than 30 days after the exercise of the put option described in this paragraph (3).
 
(4)           Right of First Refusal. Shares of Company Stock distributed by the Trustee to a Participant or Beneficiary shall be subject to a “Right of First Refusal” if such shares do not constitute registration-type securities within the meaning of Code section 409(e).
 
(C)           Parties. The Right of First Refusal shall be in favor of the Company, the Plan, or both in any order of priority as determined by the Plan Administrator.
 
(D)           Price. The selling price and other terms under the Right of First Refusal must not be less favorable to the Participant than the greater of the value of the Company Stock determined under Section 10.10, or the purchase price and other written terms offered by an independent and unrelated buyer making a good faith offer to purchase the Company Stock.
 
(E)           Term. The Right of First Refusal must lapse no later than 14 days after the Participant gives written notice to the holder of the offer by an independent and unrelated buyer.
 
(F)           Conditions. The exercise of the Right of First Refusal shall be subject to the purchase provisions described in Section 8.02(d)(3)(A) above. The Company may require that the distributee execute such documents (and may provide suitable legends on the applicable stock certificates) that include the terms of the right of first refusal prior to receiving Company Stock.
 
(d)           Valuation Date. The distributable amount of a Participant’s Account is the vested portion of his Account as of a Valuation Date that follows the Participant’s Termination of Employment and the distributee’s request for distribution.
 
32

 

 

 
(e)           Restriction on Deferral of Payment. Unless otherwise elected, benefit payments under the Plan will begin to a Participant not later than the 60th day after the latest of the close of the Plan Year in which:
 
(1)           the Participant attains Normal Retirement Age;
 
(2)           occurs the 10th anniversary of the year in which his participation commenced; or
 
(3)           the Participant has a Termination of Employment.
 
(f)           Minimum Distribution Requirements. Distributions shall be made in a method that is in conformance with the requirements set forth in Section 8.05. Section 8.05 shall not be deemed to create a type of benefit (e.g., lump sum within five years or immediate lump sum payment) to any class of Participants and Beneficiaries that is not otherwise permitted by the Plan.
 
Section 8.03        Cash-Out of Small Balances
 
(a)           Vested Account Balance Does Not Exceed $1,000. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the vested amount of an Account payable to a Participant or Beneficiary does not exceed $1,000 at the time such individual becomes entitled to a distribution hereunder (or at any subsequent time established by the Plan Administrator to the extent provided in applicable Treasury regulations), such vested Account shall be paid in a lump sum as soon as administratively feasible after Termination of Employment. Such distribution shall be made in cash unless the distribute affirmatively elects a distribution of Company Stock.
 
(b)           Vested Account Balance Exceeds $1,000. If the value of a Participant’s vested Account balance exceeds $1,000, and the Account balance is immediately distributable, the Participant must consent to any distribution of such Account balance. Notwithstanding the foregoing, payments shall be made as of the Participant’s Required Beginning Date in the form of a lump sum payment. The Participant’s consent shall be obtained in writing within the 180-day period ending on the Distribution Date. The Plan Administrator shall notify the Participant of the right to defer any distribution. Such notification shall include a general description of the material features, and an explanation of the relative values of, the optional forms of benefit available under the Plan, and shall be provided no less than 30 days and no more than 180 days prior to the Distribution Date. Distribution may commence less than 30 days after the notice described in the preceding sentence is given, provided the Plan Administrator clearly informs the Participant that he has a right to a period of at least 30 days after receiving the notice to consider the decision of whether or not to elect a distribution (and, if applicable, a particular distribution option), and the Participant, after receiving the notice, affirmatively elects a distribution. In the event a Participant’s vested Account balance becomes distributable without consent pursuant to this Subsection (b), and the Participant fails to elect a form of distribution, the vested Account balance of such Participant shall be paid in a single sum.
 
(c)           Required Distributions and Plan Termination. Consent of the Participant or his spouse shall not be required to the extent that a distribution is required to satisfy Code sections 401(a)(9) or 415. In addition, upon termination of this Plan the Participant’s Account balance shall be distributed to the Participant in a lump sum distribution.
 
33

 

 

 
(d)           Notice of Right to Defer. Any description of a Participant’s right to defer a distribution under Code section 411(a)(11) must also include a description of the consequences of failing to defer receipt of the distribution.
 
Section 8.04        Beneficiary
 
(a)           Beneficiary Designation Right. Each Participant, and if the Participant has died, the Beneficiary of such Participant, shall have the right to designate one or more primary and one or more secondary Beneficiaries to receive any benefit becoming payable upon such individual’s death. The spouse of a married Participant shall be the sole primary beneficiary of such Participant unless the requirements of Subsection (b) are met. All Beneficiary designations shall be in writing in a form satisfactory to the Plan Administrator and shall only be effective when filed with the Plan Administrator during the Participant’s lifetime (or if the Participant has died, during the lifetime of the Beneficiary of such Participant who desires to designate a further Beneficiary). Except as provided in Section 8.04(b), as applicable, each Participant (or Beneficiary) shall be entitled to change his Beneficiaries at any time and from time to time by filing written notice of such change with the Plan Administrator.
 
(b)           Form and Content of Spouse’s Consent. The Participant may designate a Beneficiary other than his spouse pursuant to this Subsection if: (i) the spouse has waived the spouse’s right to be the Participant’s Beneficiary in accordance with this Subsection, (ii) the Participant has no spouse, or (iii) the Plan Administrator determines that the spouse cannot be located or such other circumstances exist under which spousal consent is not required, as prescribed by Treasury regulations. If required, such consent: (i) shall be in writing, (ii) shall relate only to the specific alternate beneficiary or beneficiaries designated (or permits beneficiary designations by the Participant without the spouse’s further consent), (iii) shall acknowledge the effect of the consent, and (iv) shall be witnessed by a plan representative or notary public. Any consent by a spouse, or establishment that the consent of a spouse may not be obtained, shall not be effective with respect to any other spouse. Any spousal consent that permits subsequent changes by the Participant to the Beneficiary designation without the requirement of further spousal consent shall acknowledge that the spouse has the right to limit such consent to a specific Beneficiary, and that the spouse voluntarily elects to relinquish such right.
 
(c)           In the event that the Participant fails to designate a Beneficiary, or in the event that the Participant is predeceased by all designated primary and secondary Beneficiaries, the death benefit shall be payable to the Participant’s spouse or, if there is no spouse, to the Participant’s estate.
 
Section 8.05        Minimum Distribution Requirements
 
(a)           General Rules.
 
(1)           Effective Date.
 
(A)           In General. The requirements of this Section shall apply to any distribution of a Participant’s interest and will take precedence over any inconsistent provisions of this Plan.
 
34

 

 

 
(B)           2009 Waiver of Requirements. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Section 8.05, a Participant or Beneficiary who would have been required to receive required minimum distributions for 2009 but for the enactment of Code section 401(a)(9)(H) (“2009 RMDs”), and who would have satisfied that requirement by receiving distributions that are (1) equal to the 2009 RMDs or (2) one or more payments in a series of substantially equal distributions (that include the 2009 RMDs) made at least annually and expected to last for the life (or life expectancy) of the Participant, the joint lives (or joint life expectancy) of the Participant and the Participant’s designated Beneficiary, or for a period of at least 10 years (“Extended 2009 RMDs”), will not receive those distributions for 2009 unless the Participant or Beneficiary chooses to receive such distributions. Participants and Beneficiaries described in the preceding sentence will be given the opportunity to elect to discontinue the distributions described in the preceding sentence. If all or any portion of a distribution during 2009 is treated as an eligible rollover distribution but would not be so treated if the minimum distribution requirements under Code section 401(a)(9) had applied during 2009, such distribution shall not be treated as an eligible rollover distribution for purposes of Code sections 401(a)(31), 3405(c) or 402(f).
 
(2)           Construction. All distributions required under this Section shall be determined and made in accordance with the regulations under Code section 401(a)(9) and the minimum distribution incidental benefit requirement of Code section 401(a)(9)(G). Nothing contained in this Section shall be deemed to create a type of benefit (e.g., lump sum within five years or immediate lump sum payment) to any class of Participants and/or Beneficiaries that is not otherwise permitted by the Plan.
 
(3)           Limits on Distribution Periods. As of the first distribution calendar year, distributions to a Participant, if not made in a single-sum, may only be made over one of the following periods:
 
(A)           the life of the Participant,
 
(B)           the joint lives of the Participant and a designated beneficiary,
 
(C)           a period certain not extending beyond the life expectancy of the Participant, or
 
(D)           a period certain not extending beyond the joint life and last survivor expectancy of the Participant and a designated beneficiary.
 
(b)           Time and Manner of Distribution.
 
(1)           Required Beginning Date. Unless an earlier date is specified in Section 8.02(b), the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, to the Participant no later than the Participant’s Required Beginning Date.
 
35

 

 

 
(2)           Death of Participant Before Distributions Begin. If the Participant dies before distributions begin, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, no later than as follows:
 
(A)           If the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole designated beneficiary, then unless an earlier date is specified in Section 8.02(b), distributions to the surviving spouse will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died, or by December 31 of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained age 70½, if later.
 
(B)           If the Participant’s surviving spouse is not the Participant’s sole designated beneficiary, then, unless otherwise specified in Section 8.02(b), distributions to the designated beneficiary will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died.
 
(C)           If there is no designated beneficiary as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant’s death, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death unless an earlier date is specified in Section 8.02(b).
 
(D)           If the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole designated beneficiary and the surviving spouse dies after the Participant but before distributions to the surviving spouse are required to begin, this Subsection (b)(2), other than Subsection (b)(2)(A), will apply as if the surviving spouse were the Participant except as otherwise provided in Section 8.02(b).
 
(E)           For purposes of this Subsection (b)(2) and Subsection (d), unless Subsection (b)(2)(D) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the Participant’s Required Beginning Date. If Subsection (b)(2)(D) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the date distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under section Subsection (b)(2)(A). If distributions under an annuity purchased from an insurance company irrevocably commence to the Participant before the Participant’s Required Beginning Date (or to the Participant’s surviving spouse before the date distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Subsection (b)(2)(A)), the date distributions are considered to begin is the date distributions actually commence.
 
(3)           Forms of Distribution. Unless the Participant’s interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company or in a single-sum on or before the Required Beginning Date, as of the first distribution calendar year distributions will be made in accordance with Subsections (c) and (d) to the extent otherwise permitted by the Plan. If the Participant’s interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company, distributions thereunder will be made in accordance with the requirements of Code 401(a)(9) and the regulations.
 
(c)           Required Minimum Distributions During Participant’s Lifetime.
 
36

 

 

 
(1)           Amount of Required Minimum Distribution For Each Distribution Calendar Year. During the Participant’s lifetime, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year is the lesser of:
 
(A)           the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s account balance by the distribution period in the Uniform Lifetime Table set forth in Treas. Reg. section 1.401(a)(9)-9, Q&A-2 using the Participant’s age as of the Participant’s birthday in the distribution calendar year; or
 
(B)           if the Participant’s sole designated beneficiary for the distribution calendar year is the Participant’s spouse, the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s account balance by the number in the Joint and Last Survivor Table set forth in Treas. Reg. section 1.401(a)(9)-9 using the Participant’s and spouse’s attained ages as of the Participant’s and spouse’s birthdays in the distribution calendar year.
 
(2)           Lifetime Required Minimum Distributions Continue Through Year of Participant’s Death. Required minimum distributions will be determined under this Subsection (c) beginning with the first distribution calendar year and continuing up to, and including, the distribution calendar year that includes the Participant’s date of death.
 
(d)           Required Minimum Distributions After Participant’s Death.
 
(1)           Death On or After Date Distributions Begin.
 
(A)           Participant Survived by Designated Beneficiary. If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is a designated beneficiary, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s account balance by the longer of the remaining life expectancy of the Participant or the remaining life expectancy of the Participant’s designated beneficiary, determined as follows:
 
(i)           The Participant’s remaining life expectancy is calculated using the age of the Participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.
 
(ii)           If the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole designated beneficiary, the remaining life expectancy of the surviving spouse is calculated for each distribution calendar year after the year of the Participant’s death using the surviving spouse’s age as of the spouse’s birthday in that year. For distribution calendar years after the year of the surviving spouse’s death, the remaining life expectancy of the surviving spouse is calculated using the age of the surviving spouse as of the spouse’s birthday in the calendar year of the spouse’s death, reduced by one for each subsequent calendar year.
 
(iii)           If the Participant’s surviving spouse is not the Participant’s sole designated beneficiary, the designated beneficiary’s remaining life expectancy is calculated using the age of the beneficiary in the year following the year of the Participant’s death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.
 
37

 

 

 
(B)           No Designated Beneficiary. If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is no designated beneficiary as of the September 30 of the year after the year of the Participant’s death, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s account balance by the Participant’s remaining life expectancy calculated using the age of the Participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.
 
(2)           Death Before Date Distributions Begin.
 
(A)           Participant Survived by Designated Beneficiary. If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is a designated beneficiary, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s account balance by the remaining life expectancy of the Participant’s designated beneficiary, determined as provided in Subsection (d)(1).
 
(B)           No Designated Beneficiary. If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is no designated beneficiary as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant’s death, distribution of the Participant’s entire interest will be completed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death.
 
(C)           Death of Surviving Spouse Before Distributions to Surviving Spouse Are Required to Begin. If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin, the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole designated beneficiary, and the surviving spouse dies before distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Subsection (b)(2)(A), this Subsection (d)(2) will apply as if the surviving spouse were the Participant.
 
(e)           Definitions.
 
(1)           Designated Beneficiary. The individual who is designated by the Participant (or the Participant’s surviving spouse) as the beneficiary of the Participant’s interest under the plan and who is the designated beneficiary under Code section 401(a)(9) and Treas. Reg. section 1.401(a)(9)-4.
 
(2)           Distribution Calendar Year. A calendar year for which a minimum distribution is required. For distributions beginning before the Participant’s death, the first distribution calendar year is the calendar year immediately preceding the calendar year which contains the Participant’s Required Beginning Date. For distributions beginning after the Participant’s death, the first distribution calendar year is the calendar year in which distributions are required to begin under Subsection (b)(2). The required minimum distribution for the Participant’s first distribution calendar year will be made on or before the Participant’s Required Beginning Date. The required minimum distribution for other distribution calendar years, including the required minimum distribution for the distribution calendar year in which the Participant’s Required Beginning Date occurs, will be made on or before December 31 of that distribution calendar year.
 
38

 

 

 
(3)           Life expectancy. Life expectancy as computed by use of the Single Life Table in Treas. Reg. section 1.401(a)(9)-9, Q&A-1.
 
(4)           Participant’s Account Balance. The account balance as of the last valuation date in the calendar year immediately preceding the distribution calendar year (valuation calendar year) increased by the amount of any contributions made and allocated or forfeitures allocated to the account as of dates in the valuation calendar year after the valuation date and decreased by distributions made in the valuation calendar year after the valuation date. The account balance for the valuation calendar year includes any amounts rolled over or transferred to the Plan either in the valuation calendar year or in the distribution calendar year if distributed or transferred in the valuation calendar year.
 
Section 8.06      Direct Rollovers
 
(a)           In General. Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary that would otherwise limit a distributee’s election under this part, a distributee may elect, at the time and in the manner prescribed by the Plan Administrator, to have any portion of an eligible rollover distribution that is equal to at least $200 (or such lesser amount as determined by the Plan Administrator in a nondiscriminatory manner) paid directly to an eligible retirement plan specified by the distributee in a direct rollover. If an eligible rollover distribution is less than $500 (or such lesser amount as determined by the Plan Administrator in a nondiscriminatory manner), a distributee may not make the election described in the preceding sentence to roll over a portion of the eligible rollover distribution.
 
(b)           Definitions.
 
(1)           Eligible Rollover Distribution. An eligible rollover distribution is any distribution of all or any portion of the balance to the credit of the distributee, except that an eligible rollover distribution does not include: any distribution that is one of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the distributee or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of the distributee and the distributee’s designated beneficiary, or for a specified period of ten years or more; any distribution to the extent such distribution is required under Code section 401(a)(9); any hardship distribution; the portion of any other distribution(s) that is not includible in gross income (determined without regard to the exclusion for net unrealized appreciation with respect to employer securities); and any other distribution(s) that is reasonably expected to total less than $200 during a year.
 
A portion of a distribution shall not fail to be an eligible rollover distribution merely because the portion consists of after-tax employee contributions which are not includible in gross income. However, such portion may be transferred only to an individual retirement account or annuity described in Code section 408(a) or (b), or to a qualified defined contribution plan described in Code section 401(a) or 403(a) that agrees to separately account for amounts so transferred, including separately accounting for the portion of such distribution which is includible in gross income and the portion of such distribution which is not so includible.
 
39

 

 

 
(2)           Eligible Retirement Plan. An eligible retirement plan is an eligible plan under Code section 457(b) which is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or any agency or instrumentality of a state or political subdivision of a state and which agrees to separately account for amounts transferred into such plan from this Plan, an individual retirement account described in Code section 408(a), individual retirement annuity described in Code section 408(b), an annuity plan described in Code section 403(a), an annuity contract described in Code section 403(b), or a qualified plan described in Code section 401(a), that accepts the distributee’s eligible rollover distribution. The definition of eligible retirement plan shall also apply in the case of a distribution to a surviving spouse, or to a spouse or former spouse who is the alternate payee under a qualified domestic relation order, as defined in Code section 414(p).
 
Notwithstanding the foregoing, effective for distributions made after December 31, 2007, a Participant may roll over a distribution from the Plan to a Roth IRA provided that the amount rolled over is an eligible rollover distribution (as defined in Code section 402(c)(4)) and, pursuant to Code section 408A(d)(3)(A), there is included in gross income any amount that would be includible if the distribution were not rolled over.
 
Notwithstanding the foregoing, effective January 1, 2007, a non-spouse Beneficiary who is a designated beneficiary within the meaning of Code section 401(a)(9)(E) may, after the death of the Participant, make a direct rollover of a distribution to an IRA established on behalf of the designated Beneficiary; provided that the distributed amount satisfies all the requirements to be an eligible rollover distribution other than the requirement that the distribution be made to the Participant or the Participant’s spouse. Such direct rollovers shall be subject to the terms and conditions of IRS Notice 2007-7 and superseding guidance, including but not limited to the provision in Q&A-17 regarding required minimum distributions. Effective January 1, 2010, the distributions described in this paragraph shall be subject to Code sections 401(a)(31), 402(f) and 3405(c).
 
Notwithstanding the foregoing, effective for taxable years beginning on or after January 1, 2007, a portion of a distribution shall not fail to be an eligible rollover distribution merely because such portion consists of amounts which are not includible in gross income. However, such portion may be transferred as a direct rollover only to a qualified trust or to an annuity contract described in Code section 403(b) that agrees to separately account for amounts so transferred, including separately accounting for the portion of such distribution which is includible in gross income and the portion of such distribution which is not so includible.
 
(3)           Distributee. A distributee includes an employee or former employee. In addition, the employee’s or former employee’s surviving spouse and the employee’s or former employee’s spouse or former spouse who is the alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order, as defined in Code section 414(p), are distributees with regard to the interest of the spouse or former spouse.
 
(4)           Direct Rollover. A direct rollover is a payment by the Plan to the eligible retirement plan specified by the distributee.
 
40

 

 

 
(c)           Automatic Rollovers. This Subsection (c) shall be effective for mandatory distributions made on or after March 28, 2005. In the event of a mandatory distribution greater than $1,000 in accordance with the provisions of Section 8.03(a), if the Participant does not elect to have such distribution paid directly to an eligible retirement plan specified by the Participant in a direct rollover or to receive the distribution directly in accordance with Section 8.02, then the Plan Administrator will pay the distribution in a direct rollover to an individual retirement plan designated by the Plan Administrator.
 
(d)           Special Rule for S Corporations. The Plan may permit a direct rollover of the distribution of S Corporation stock to an IRA, provided that:
 
(1)           The S Corporation shall repurchase the stock immediately upon the Plan’s distribution of the stock to an IRA;
 
(2)           Either: (i) the S Corporation must repurchase the S Corporation stock contemporaneously with, and effective on the same day as, the distribution, or (ii) the Plan may assume the rights and obligations of the S Corporation to repurchase the S Corporation stock immediately upon the Plan’s distribution of the stock to an IRA and the Plan repurchases the S Corporation stock contemporaneously with, and effective on the same day as, the distribution;
 
(3)           No income (including tax-exempt income), loss, deduction, or credit attributable to the distributed S Corporation stock under Code section 1366 shall be allocated to the Participant’s IRA.
 
Section 8.07        Minor or Legally Incompetent Payee
 
If a distribution is to be made to an individual who is either a minor or legally incompetent, the Plan Administrator may direct that such distribution be paid to the legal guardian. If a distribution is to be made to a minor and there is no legal guardian, payment may be made to a parent of such minor or a responsible adult with whom the minor maintains his residence, or to the custodian for such minor under the Uniform Transfer to Minors Act, if such is permitted by the laws of the state in which such minor resides. In case of incompetency of a Participant or Beneficiary entitled to receive any distribution under the Plan, and if the Trustee shall be advised of the existence of such condition, the Trustee shall direct distribution to a person or institution designated by a court which has jurisdiction over such recipient or a person or institution otherwise having legal authority under state law for the care and control of such recipient. Such payment shall fully discharge the Trustee, Plan Administrator, Trust Fund, and the Employer from further liability on account thereof.
 
Section 8.08        Missing Payee
 
If all or any portion of the distribution payable to a Participant or Beneficiary shall, for a period of more than five years after such distribution becomes payable, remain unpaid because the Plan Administrator has been unable to ascertain the whereabouts of the Participant or Beneficiary after sending a certified letter, return receipt requested, to the last known address of such Participant or Beneficiary, the amount so distributable shall be treated as a forfeiture under Article 7 hereof. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if a claim is subsequently made by the Participant or Beneficiary for the forfeited benefit, such benefit shall be reinstated without any credit or deduction for earnings and losses. Amounts forfeited from a Participant’s Account under this Section shall be used to restore forfeitures, allocated as an additional Company contribution pursuant to Article 4 or used to pay reasonable Plan expenses.
 
41

 

 

 
Section 8.09        Distributions Upon Termination of Plan
 
A Participant may receive the balance of his Account in a lump sum payment upon termination of the Plan without the establishment of alternative defined contribution plan (as described in Treas. Reg. section 1.401(k)-2(d)(4)) other than an employee stock ownership plan (as defined in Code section 4975(e) or Code section 409), a simplified employee pension plan (as defined in Code section 408(k)), a SIMPLE IRA Plan (defined in Code section 408(p)), a plan or contract that satisfies the requirements of Code section 403(b), or a plan that is described in Code section 457(b) or (f).
 
ARTICLE 9
IN-SERVICE DISTRIBUTIONS
 
Section 9.01         Transfer Account
 
A Participant may receive a distribution from his Transfer Account as permitted under the terms of any plan from which funds in such Account were transferred to the extent that such optional forms of benefit must be preserved pursuant to Code section 411(d)(6).
 
 
ARTICLE 10
INVESTMENT AND VALUATION OF TRUST FUND
 
Section 10.01        Investment of Assets
 
All existing assets of the Trust Fund and all future contributions shall be invested in accordance with the terms of this Article 10. All assets of the Trust Fund may be commingled for investment purposes with the assets of any retirement plan which is maintained by the Company and which qualifies under Code section 401(a) and may be held as a single fund under one or more trust instruments; provided that the value of each plan’s assets can be determined at any time. The assets allocable to each such plan shall in no event be used for the benefit of Participants in the other plans.
 
Section 10.02        Participant Self Direction
 
(a)           In General. The Plan Administrator may permit Participants to direct the investment of their Accounts pursuant to this Section 10.02. Any Participant self direction shall be made pursuant to such uniform guidelines and procedures as the Plan Administrator may establish from time to time. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Participant may not alter his investment in the Company Stock Fund except as provided in Subsection (b) below.
 
42

 

 

 
(b)           Pre-Retirement Diversification Rights.
 
(1)           The Plan Administrator shall offer a Qualified Participant the option to direct the investment of Company Stock into other Investment Funds pursuant to this Subsection and Code section 401(a)(28)(B)(ii)(II) during the diversification election period. The Plan must offer at least 3 such other Investment Funds. The Participant must elect such option within 90 days after the end of each Plan Year during the diversification election period (or as soon as administratively feasible after the fair market value of Company Stock is determined as of the end of the Plan Year), and the value of such Company Stock will be invested as directed by such Participant within 180 days after the end of such Plan Year.
 
(2)           The maximum number of shares of Company Stock which a Qualified Participant may elect to reinvest as of the end of each of the Plan Years during the diversification election period shall be that number of such shares (rounded to the nearest whole number) which is equal to the result determined by the formula (25% x (A + B)) - B, where A is the number of shares of Company Stock which are allocated to his Account as of the applicable date and B is the number of shares of Company Stock, if any, previously reinvested by the Participant pursuant to this Subsection, provided that for purposes of determining such maximum number of shares for the last Plan Year in a Diversification election period, fifty percent (50%) shall be substituted for twenty-five percent (25%). No Participant may elect to reinvest during any diversification period if the fair market value as of the end of the preceding Plan Year of Company Stock allocated to such Participant’s account is $500 or less.
 
(3)           For purposes of this Subsection, the diversification election period means the six Plan Years beginning with the Plan Year during which a Participant becomes a Qualified Participant, and a Qualified Participant is a Participant who has attained age 55 and has 10 years of participation in the Plan. For this purpose, a year of participation is any Plan Year in which the Participant was eligible to receive an allocation of Employer Contributions.
 
(4)           In the event a Participant elects to diversify pursuant to the foregoing, the Plan Administrator may elect instead to distribute to such Participant the amounts subject to such election. Diversification may also be accomplished by a trustee to trustee transfer to another defined contribution plan sponsored by the Employer in which the Participant may direct the investment of the transferred amount.
 
(5)           Notwithstanding the foregoing, this Subsection (b) shall not apply in the event the Plan becomes an “applicable defined contribution plan” to which Code section 401(a)(35) applies.
 
(c)           Investment Elections. To the extent provided in Subsections (a) and (b), each Participant shall direct in the form and manner and at the time or times prescribed by the Plan Administrator the percentage of the applicable Accounts to be invested in one or more of the available Investment Funds, subject to such rules and limitations as the Plan Administrator may prescribe. After the death of the Participant, a Beneficiary shall be entitled to make investment elections as if the Beneficiary were the Participant. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Plan Administrator may restrict investment transfers to the extent required to comply with applicable law.
 
(d)           Divestiture of Publicly-Traded Employer Securities. To the extent provided in Code section 401(a)(35), Treas. Reg. 1.401(a)(35)-1 and any superseding guidance, an applicable individual may elect to direct the Plan to divest any publicly traded employer securities held in the applicable portion of his or her Account and to reinvest an equivalent amount in three or more other investment options offered under the Plan. This diversification right only applies to publicly traded employer securities that are held in the Account for which the individual meets the definition of applicable individual.
 
43

 

 

 
Section 10.03        Individual Accounts
 
There shall be maintained on the books of the Plan with respect to each Participant, as applicable, an Employer Contribution Account, Transfer Account, and any other Account established by the Plan Administrator. Each such Account shall separately reflect the Participant’s interest in the Trust Fund relating to such Account. Each Participant shall receive, at least annually, a statement of his Account. A Participant’s interest in the Trust Fund shall be determined and accounted for based on his beneficial interest in such fund.
 
Section 10.04        Qualifying Employer Investments
 
The Trustee may invest up to 100% of the fair market value of the assets of the Trust Fund in “qualifying employer securities.” The term “employer security” means a security issued by an employer of employees covered by the Plan or by an affiliate of such employer. A contract to which ERISA section 408(b)(5) applies shall not be treated as a security for purposes of this section.
 
Section 10.05        Allocation of Earnings and Losses
 
(a)           Reinvestment. Except as provided in Section 10.09, the dividends, capital gains distributions, and other earnings received on the Trust Fund shall be allocated to such fund and reinvested.
 
(b)           Valuation. Except as provided in Section 10.10, the assets of each Investment Fund shall be valued by the Trustee at their current fair market value as of each Valuation Date, and Accounts of each Participant with interests in that Investment Fund shall be credited with such Participant’s allocable share of the earnings and losses of each Investment Fund since the immediately preceding Valuation Date. Such allocation shall be done on the basis of such Participant’s interest in the applicable Investment Fund. For purposes of the allocation of investment earnings and losses, the Plan Administrator shall adjust the value of interests of Investment Funds in Accounts as of the preceding Valuation Date to account for any contributions, distributions or withdrawals that occur after such preceding Valuation Date.
 
(c)           Allocation to Individual Accounts. The Accounts of each Participant shall be adjusted as of each Valuation Date by (i) reducing such Accounts by any distributions and withdrawals made therefrom since the preceding Valuation Date, (ii) increasing or reducing such Accounts by the Participant’s share of earnings and losses and reasonable fees charged against such accounts at the direction of the Plan Administrator, and (iii) crediting such Accounts with any contributions made thereto since the preceding Valuation Date.
 
44

 

 

 
(d)           Allocation of Expenses. The Plan Administrator may allocate all, none or any portion of the Plan’s expenses to Participant Accounts. When allocating expenses among Participant Accounts, the Plan Administrator may allocate such expenses using any reasonable method that does not violate Title I of ERISA and does not discriminate in favor of Highly Compensated Employees within the meaning of applicable provisions of Code section 401(a)(4). Such methods may include, but not be limited to: (i) allocating expenses only to current or former employees (or among any other classification(s) of employees), (ii) allocating expenses directly to individual employees, (iii) allocating expenses using the per capita or pro rata method, and (iv) any combination of the foregoing.
 
(e)           Valuation for Distribution. Except as provided in Section 10.10, for the purposes of paying the amounts to be distributed to a Participant or Beneficiary pursuant to Articles 7 and 8, the value of the Participant’s interest shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article as of the Valuation Date related to the date benefits are paid.
 
(f)           No Rights Created by Allocation. An allocation of contributions or earnings to the separate account of a Participant under this Article 10 shall not cause the Participant to have any right, title or interest in any assets of the Plan except at the time and under the terms and conditions expressly provided for in the Plan.
 
Section 10.06        Voting Rights
 
(a)           Accounts other than ESOP Accounts. The Trustee shall deliver, or cause to be executed and delivered, to the Plan Administrator all notices, prospectuses, financial statements, proxies and proxy soliciting materials received by the Trustee relating to securities other than Company Stock held by the Trust or, if applicable, deliver these materials to the appropriate Participant or the Beneficiary of a deceased Participant. The Trustee shall vote any securities held by the Trust in accordance with the instructions of the Plan Administrator, Participant or the Beneficiary of a deceased Participant and shall not vote securities for which it has not received instructions.
 
(b)           ESOP Accounts. Except as provided below, all Company Stock held in the Trust and allocated to ESOP Accounts shall generally be voted by the Trustee, as directed by the Plan Administrator.
 
(1)           In General. Each Participant or, if applicable, his Beneficiary shall be entitled to direct the Trustee as to the exercise of any voting rights attributable to shares of Company Stock then allocated to his ESOP Accounts.
 
(2)           Nonregistered Securities. Notwithstanding the foregoing, this Subsection (b)(2) shall apply if the Company Stock does not constitute registration-type securities within the meaning of Code section 409(e). A Participant or Beneficiary shall only be entitled to direct the Trustee with respect to the approval or disapproval of any corporate merger or consolidation, recapitalization, reclassification, liquidation, dissolution, sale of substantially all of the assets of a trade or business, or such other transactions which may be prescribed by applicable Treasury regulations promulgated under Code section 409(e). Each Participant shall be entitled to one vote with respect to such issues.
 
(3)           Instructions. If Participants are entitled to so direct the Trustee as to the voting of Company Stock pursuant to Subsection (b)(1) or (b)(2), all such Company Stock as to which such instructions have been received (which may include an instruction to abstain) shall be voted in accordance with such instructions. However, the Trustee shall vote any unallocated Company Stock in the Trust Fund, or any allocated Company Stock as to which no voting instructions have been received, in the same proportion as Company Stock as to which voting instructions have been received, unless otherwise directed by the Plan Administrator.
 
45

 

 

 
(4)           Exempt Loan Subject to Code Section 133. Each Participant or, if applicable, his Beneficiary shall be entitled to direct the Trustee as to the exercise of any and all voting rights attributable to shares of Company Stock then allocated to his Account that were acquired with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan that is subject to the full pass through voting requirements of Code section 133.
 
(5)           Tender Offer. In the event of a tender offer for any Common Stock, the Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee to accept or reject the offer with respect to the shares of Company Stock held in the Trust Fund.
 
(c)           General Rules. As soon as practicable prior to the occasion for the exercise of voting rights described in this Section, the Trustee shall deliver or cause to be delivered, to each Participant and Beneficiary of a deceased Participant entitled to vote all notices, prospectuses, financial statements, proxies and proxy soliciting material relating to such investment allocated to the Participant’s Account. Instructions by Participants and Beneficiaries to the Trustee shall be in such form and pursuant to such regulations as the Plan Administrator shall prescribe. Any such instructions shall remain in the strict confidence of the Trustee. With respect to fractional shares for which instructions are received by the Trustee, the Trustee shall aggregate all such fractional shares for which the same instructions are received into whole shares and shall vote such whole shares as instructed. Any remaining fractional shares shall be voted by the Trustee in the same proportion that the shares for which instructions are received are voted.
 
Section 10.07        Liquidity
 
(a)           Trustee’s Put Option. If Trustee determined that the Trust does not have sufficient cash to provide for distributions of benefits, payment of expenses or for other expenditures, the Trustee shall have an option to sell shares of Company Stock to the Company to the extent necessary to provide for such expenditures, provided the sale does not violate the terms of the Plan or applicable law. The sales price shall be determined pursuant to Section 10.10.
 
(b)           Loans. If permitted under applicable law, rulings or regulations, and not a prohibited transaction under Code section 4975(c) or sections 406 or 407 of ERISA (or a prohibited transaction exemption), the Plan Administrator, at the request of the Trustee, shall cause the Company to advance to the Trustee the amounts needed for distributions of benefits, payment of expenses or for other expenditures. Such amounts shall be reimbursed by the Trustee to the Company, with such interest as may be permitted under ERISA.
 
Section 10.08        Restrictions on Company Stock
 
Except as required by Code section 409(h) and by Treas. Reg. section 54.4975-7(b)(9) and (10), or as otherwise required by applicable law, no Company Stock purchased with an Exempt Loan may be subject to a put, call or other option, or buy-sell or similar arrangement while held by, and when distributed from, the Plan, whether or not the Plan is an employee stock ownership plan within the meaning of Code section 4975(e)(7) at that time. The Plan shall not obligate itself to acquire securities from a particular security holder at an indefinite time determined upon the happening of an event such as the death of the holder.
 
46

 

 

 
Section 10.09        Treatment of Dividends
 
(a)           Cash Dividends. The term “dividend” in this Section 10.09 shall generally include both C Corporation dividends as described in Code section 316 and all distributions made with respect to the shares of stock in an S Corporation.
 
(1)           Dividends on Unallocated Company Stock. Any cash dividends received which are attributable to shares of Company Stock (i) acquired with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan and (ii) held in the Suspense Account or the Released and Unallocated Account shall be either: (x) held invested until the next Exempt Loan repayment, at which time such dividends, and interest thereon, shall be applied to repay the principal and, at the Plan Administrator’s discretion the interest, of the Exempt Loan; or (y) allocated to Participants’ Accounts under Article 4 for such Plan Year.
 
(2)           Dividends on Allocated Company Stock. As determined in the sole discretion of the Plan Administrator, any cash dividends paid with respect to shares of Company Stock allocated to a Participant’s Account may be: (i) used to repay the principal balance of an outstanding Exempt Loan or interest thereon in whole or in part pursuant to Subsection (a)(2)(A) below; (ii) allocated to Participants’ Accounts; or (iii) for C Corporation dividends only, distributed currently (or within 90 days after the close of the Plan Year in which such dividends are paid to the Trustee) in cash to such Participants (or their Beneficiaries) on a nondiscriminatory basis pursuant to Subsection (a)(2)(B) below.
 
(A)           Repay Exempt Loan. In the event the Plan Administrator elects to repay the Exempt Loan, Company Stock with a fair market value of not less than the amount of such dividend shall be allocated to each Participant to whom such dividend would have been allocated.
 
(B)           Distribute to Participants. The Plan Administrator may distribute C Corporation cash dividends paid with respect to shares of Company Stock allocated to Participants’ Accounts. The Plan Administrator may also allow Plan Participants to further elect to have such dividends paid to the Plan, or be distributed currently in cash to such Participants (or their Beneficiaries) under such election procedures as may be established by the Plan Administrator; provided that the dividends are paid within 90 days after the close of the Plan Year in which such dividends are paid. Such distributions may be made directly by the Company or by the Trustee after receipt of the dividends.
 
(b)           Stock Dividends. Stock dividends paid (and stock received by the Trustee as a result of a stock split, stock conversion, reorganization or recapitalization of the Company) shall be credited to the account under which such dividends arise.
 
(c)           If Participants are offered an election under Code section 404(k)(2)(A)(iii), any C Corporation dividends allocated to Participants’ Accounts shall be fully vested at all times.
 
47

 

 

 
Section 10.10         Use of Appraiser
 
If the Company Stock is not readily tradable on an established securities market (within the meaning of IRS Notice 2011-19 for Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2012 or such later date provided in such Notice), all valuations of Company Stock acquired by or contributed to the Plan with respect to activities carried on by the Plan shall be performed by an independent appraiser. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the term “independent appraiser” shall mean an appraiser as defined under Code section 170A and meeting the requirements of Code section 401(a)(28). In the case of a transaction between the Plan and a Disqualified Person, value must be determined as of the date of the applicable transaction. For all other purposes under the Plan, value must be determined as of the most recent Valuation Date under the Plan.
 
ARTICLE 11
TRUST FUND
 
Section 11.01         Trust Fund
 
(a)           Continuation of Trust Fund. A trust is hereby continued under the Plan and the Trustee will maintain a trust account for the Plan and, as part thereof, Participants’ accounts for such individuals as the Company shall from time to time give written notice to the Trustee are Participants in the Plan. The Trustee will accept and hold in the Trust Fund such contributions on behalf of Participants as it may receive from time to time from the Company, including amounts transferred by any prior trustee of the Plan, and such earnings, income and appreciation as may accrue thereon; less losses, depreciation and payments made by the Trustee to carry out the purposes of the Plan. The Trust Fund shall be fully invested and reinvested in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Plan.
 
(b)           Exclusive Benefit. All contributions made to the Plan are made for the exclusive benefit of the Participants and their Beneficiaries, and such contributions shall not be used for, nor diverted to, purposes other than for the exclusive benefit of the Participants and their Beneficiaries (including the costs of maintaining and administering the Plan and corresponding trust).
 
(c)           Return of Contributions. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan: (i) as contributions made prior to the receipt of an initial determination letter are conditional upon a favorable determination as to the qualified status of the Plan under Code section 401(a), if the Plan receives an adverse determination with respect to its initial qualification, then any such contribution may be returned to the Company within one year after such determination, provided the application for determination is made by the time prescribed by law; (ii) contributions made by the Company based upon mistake of fact may be returned to the Company within one year of such contribution; (iii) as all contributions to the Plan are conditioned upon their deductibility under the Code, if a deduction for such a contribution is disallowed, such contribution may be returned to the Company within one year of the disallowance of such deduction; and (iv) after all liabilities under the Plan have been satisfied, the remaining assets of the Trust shall be distributed to the Company if such distribution does not contravene any provision of applicable law.
 
48

 

 

 
In the case of the return of a contribution due to mistake of fact or the disallowance of a deduction, the amount that may be returned is the excess of the amount contributed over the amount that would have been contributed had there not been a mistake or disallowance. Earnings attributable to the excess contributions may not be returned to the Company but losses attributable thereto must reduce the amount to be so returned. Any return of contribution or distribution of assets made by the Trustee pursuant to this Section shall be made only upon the direction of the Company, which shall have exclusive responsibility for determining whether the conditions of such return or distribution have been satisfied and for the amount to be returned.
 
(d)           Assets Not Held by Trustee. The Trustee shall not be responsible for any assets of the Plan that are held outside of the Trust Fund. The Trustee is expressly hereby relieved of any responsibility or liability for any losses resulting to the Plan arising from any acts or omissions on the part of any insurance company holding assets outside of the Trust Fund.
 
Section 11.02         Duties of the Trustee
 
(a)           In General. The Trustee is not a party to, and has no duties or responsibilities under the Plan, other than those that may be expressly contained in this Article. The Trustee shall have no duties, responsibilities or liability with respect to the acts or omissions of any prior trustee. The Trustee shall discharge its assigned duties and responsibilities under this Article and the Plan with the care, skill, prudence, and diligence under the circumstances then prevailing that a prudent person acting in a like capacity and familiar with such matters would use in the conduct of an enterprise of a like character and with like aims.
 
(b)           Contributions.  The Trustee agrees to accept contributions that are paid to it by the Company (as well as rollover contributions and direct transfers from other eligible retirement plans) in accordance with the terms of this Article. Such contributions shall be in cash or in such other form that may be acceptable to the Trustee. In-kind contributions of other than qualifying employer securities are permitted only in non-pension plans provided that the contribution is discretionary and unencumbered. Qualifying employer securities may be contributed to both pension and non-pension plans subject to the requirements of ERISA section 408(e). The Trustee shall have no duty to determine or collect contributions under the Plan and shall have no responsibility for any property until it is received by the Trustee. The Company shall have the sole duty and responsibility for the determination of the accuracy or sufficiency of the contributions to be made under the Plan, the transmittal of the same to the Trustee and compliance with any statute, regulation or rule applicable to contributions.
 
(c)           Distributions. The Trustee shall make distributions out of the Trust Fund pursuant to instructions described in Section 11.05. The Trustee shall not have any responsibility or duty under this Article for determining that such are in accordance with the terms of the Plan and applicable law, including without limitation, the amount, timing or method of payment and the identity of each person to whom such payments shall be made. The Trustee shall have no responsibility or duty to determine the tax effect of any payment or to see to the application of any payment. In making payments, the Company acknowledges that the Trustee is acting as a paying agent and not as the payor, for tax information reporting and withholding purposes. In the event that any dispute shall arise as to the persons to whom payment or delivery of any assets shall be made by the Trustee, the Trustee may withhold such payment or delivery until such dispute shall have been settled by the parties concerned or shall have been determined by a court of competent jurisdiction.
 
49

 

 

 
(d)           Records. The Trustee shall keep full and accurate accounts of all receipts, investments, disbursements and other transactions hereunder, including such specific records as may be agreed upon in writing between the Company and the Trustee. All such accounts, books and records shall be open to inspection and audit at all reasonable times by any authorized representative of the Company or the Plan Administrator. A Participant may examine only those individual account records pertaining directly to him.
 
(e)           Accounting. The Trustee shall file with the Plan Administrator a written account of the administration of the Trust Fund showing all transactions effected by the Trustee subsequent to the period covered by the last preceding account and all property held at the end of the accounting period. The Trustee shall use its best effort to file such written account within ninety (90) days, but not later than one hundred twenty (120) days after the end of each Plan Year. Upon approval of such accounting by the Plan Administrator, neither the Company nor the Plan Administrator shall be entitled to any further accounting by the Trustee. The Plan Administrator may approve such accounting by written notice of approval delivered to the Trustee or by failure to express objection to such accounting in writing delivered to the Trustee within six (6) months from the date on which the accounting is delivered to the Plan Administrator.
 
(f)            Participant Eligibility. The Trustee shall not be required to determine the facts concerning the eligibility of any Participant to participate in the Plan, the amount of benefits payable to any Participant or Beneficiary under the Plan, or the date or method of payment or disbursement. The Trustee shall be fully entitled to rely in good faith solely upon the written advice and directions of the Plan Administrator as to any such question of fact.
 
(g)           Indicia of Ownership. The Trustee shall not hold the indicia of ownership of any assets of the Trust Fund outside of the jurisdiction of the District Courts of the United States, unless in compliance with section 404(b) of ERISA and regulations thereunder.
 
(h)           Notice. The Trustee shall provide the Company with advance notice of any legal actions the Trustee may take with respect to the Plan and Trust and shall promptly notify the Company of any claim against the Plan and Trust.
 
(i)            Other Fiduciaries. The Trustee shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of any other persons except as may be required by ERISA section 405.
 
Section 11.03         General Investment Powers
 
In addition to all powers and authority under common law, statutory authority and other provisions of this Article, the Trustee shall have the following powers and authorities to be exercised in accordance with and subject to the provisions of Section 11.04 hereof:
 
(a)           Invest and reinvest the Trust Fund in any property, real, personal or mixed, wherever situated, and whether situated, and whether or not productive of income or consisting of wasting assets, including, without limitation, common and preferred stock, bonds, notes, debentures, options, mutual funds, leaseholds, mortgages (including without limitation, any collective or part interest in any bond and mortgage or note and mortgage), certificates of deposit, and oil, mineral or gas properties, royalties, interests or rights (including equipment pertaining thereto), without being limited to the classes of property in which trustees are authorized by law or any rule of court to invest trust funds and without regard to the proportion any such property may bear to the entire amount of the Trust Fund;
 
50

 

 

 
(b)           Hold property in nominee name, in bearer form, or in book entry form, in a clearinghouse corporation or in a depository, so long as the Trustee’s records clearly indicate that the assets held are a part of the Trust Fund and such property is held in conformance with DOL Reg. section 2550-403a-1(b);
 
(c)           Collect income payable to and distributions due to the Trust Fund and sign on behalf of the Trust any declarations, affidavits, certificates of ownership and other documents required to collect income and principal payments, including but not limited to, tax reclamations, rebates and other withheld amounts;
 
(d)           To sell, exchange, convey, transfer, grant options to purchase, or otherwise dispose of any securities or other property held by the Trustee. No person dealing with the Trustee shall be bound to see to the application of the purchase money or to inquire into the validity, expediency, or propriety of any such sale or other disposition;
 
(e)           Pursuant to the terms of Section 11.06, to vote upon any stocks, bonds, or other securities; to give general or special proxies or powers of attorney with or without power of substitution; to exercise any conversion privileges, subscription rights or other options, and to make any payments incidental thereto; to oppose, or to consent to, or otherwise participate in, corporate reorganizations or other changes affecting corporate securities, and to delegate discretionary powers, and to pay any assessments or charges in connection therewith; and generally to exercise any of the powers of an owner with respect to stocks, bonds, securities, or other property;
 
(f)           Take all action necessary to pay for authorized transactions or make authorized distributions, including exercising the power to borrow or raise monies from any lender, upon such terms and conditions as are necessary to settle such transactions or distributions;
 
(g)           To keep such portion of the Trust Fund uninvested in cash or cash balances as the Trustee may, from time to time, deem to be in the best interests of the Plan, without liability for interest thereon;
 
(h)           To accept and retain for such time as the Trustee may deem advisable any securities or other property received or acquired as Trustee hereunder, whether or not such securities or other property would normally be purchased as investments hereunder;
 
(i)            To make, execute, acknowledge, and deliver any and all documents of transfer and conveyance and any and all other instruments that may be necessary or appropriate to carry out the powers herein granted;
 
51

 

 

 
(j)            To settle, compromise, or submit to arbitration any claims, debts, or damages due or owing to or from the Trust Fund, to commence or defend suits or legal or administrative proceedings, and to represent the Plan and/or Trust Fund in all suits and legal and administrative proceedings;
 
(k)           To invest in Treasury Bills and other forms of United States government obligations;
 
(l)            Deposit cash in accounts in the banking department of the Trustee or an affiliated banking organization;
 
(m)          To deposit monies in federally insured savings accounts or certificates of deposit in banks or savings and loan associations;
 
(n)           Invest and reinvest all or any portion of the Trust Fund collectively with funds of other retirement plan trusts exempt from tax under Code section 501(a), including, without limitation, the power to invest collectively with such other funds through the medium of one or more common, collective or commingled trust funds which have been or may hereafter be operated by the Trustee, the instrument or instruments establishing such trust fund or funds, as amended from time to time, being made part of this Trust so long as any portion of the Trust Fund shall be invested through the medium thereof;
 
(o)           Sell, either at public or private sale, option to sell, mortgage, lease for a term of years less than or continuing beyond the possible date of the termination of the Trust created hereunder, partition or exchange any real property which may from time to time constitute a portion of the Trust Fund, for such prices and upon such terms as it may deem best, and to make, execute and deliver to the purchasers thereof good and sufficient deeds of conveyance therefor and all assignments, transfers and other legal instruments, either necessary or convenient for the passing of the title and ownership thereof to the purchaser, free and discharged of all trusts and without liability on the part of such purchasers to see to the proper application of the purchase price;
 
(p)           Repair, alter, improve or demolish any buildings which may be on any real estate forming part of the Trust Fund or to erect entirely new structures thereon;
 
(q)           Renew, extend or participate in the renewal or extension of any mortgage, upon such terms as may be deemed advisable, and to agree to a reduction in the rate of interest on any mortgage or to any other modification or change in the terms of any mortgage or of any guarantee pertaining thereto, in any manner and to any extent that may be deemed advisable for the protection of the Trust Fund or the preservation of the value of the investment; to waive any default, whether in the performance of any covenant or condition of any mortgage or in the performance of any guarantee, or to enforce any such default in such manner and to such extent as may be deemed advisable; to exercise and enforce any and all rights of foreclosure, to bid on property in foreclosure, to take a deed in lieu of foreclosure with or without paying a consideration therefor, and in connection therewith to release the obligation on the bond or note secured by the mortgage; and to exercise and enforce in any action, suit or proceeding at law or in equity any rights or remedies in respect to any mortgage or guarantee;
 
52

 

 

 
(r)            Purchase any authorized investment at a premium or at a discount;
 
(s)           Establish, manage and administer a securities lending program on behalf of the Trust Fund, pursuant to which the Trustee shall have authority to cause any or all securities held in the Trust Fund to be lent to such one or more borrowers as the Trustee shall determine, in accordance with Prohibited Transaction Class Exemption 81-6. The Investment Fiduciary shall enter into a written agreement with the Trustee setting forth the terms and conditions of the Trustee’s appointment, including without limitation the compensation to be paid to the Trustee for its services with respect to such securities lending program, in accordance with Prohibited Transaction Class Exemption 82-63;
 
(t)            To purchase any annuity contract; and
 
(u)           To do all such acts and exercise all such rights and privileges, although not specifically mentioned herein, as the Trustee may deem necessary to carry out the purposes of the Plan.
 
Section 11.04         Other Investment Powers
 
(a)           Requirement for Preapproval. The powers granted the Trustee under Section 11.03 shall be exercised by the Trustee upon the written direction from the Investment Fiduciary pursuant to Sections 11.05 and 11.06. Any written direction of the Investment Fiduciary may be of a continuing nature, but may be revoked in writing by the Investment Fiduciary at any time. The Trustee shall comply with any direction as promptly as possible, provided it does not contravene the terms of the Plan or the provision of any applicable law. The Investment Fiduciary, by written direction, may require the Trustee to obtain written approval of the Investment Fiduciary before exercising such of its powers as may be specified in such direction. Any such direction may be of a continuing nature or otherwise and may be revoked in writing by the Investment Fiduciary at any time. The Trustee shall not be responsible for any loss that may result from the failure or refusal of the Investment Fiduciary to give any such required direction or approval.
 
(b)           Prohibited Transactions. The Trustee shall not engage in any prohibited transaction within the meaning of the Code and ERISA.
 
(c)           Legal Actions. The Trustee is authorized to execute all necessary receipts and releases and shall be under the duty to make efforts to collect such sums as may appear to be due (except contributions hereunder); provided, however, that the Trustee shall not be required to institute suit or maintain any litigation to collect the proceeds of any asset unless it has been indemnified to its satisfaction for counsel fees, costs, disbursements and all other expenses and liabilities to which it may in its judgment be subjected by such action. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein contained, the Trustee is authorized to compromise and adjust claims arising out of any asset held in the Trust Fund upon such terms and conditions as the Trustee may deem just, and the action so taken by the Trustee shall be binding and conclusive upon all persons interested in the Trust Fund.
 
(d)           Retention of Advisors. The Trustee, with the consent of the Investment Fiduciary, may retain the services of investment advisors to invest and reinvest the assets of the Trust Fund, as well as employ such legal, actuarial, medical, accounting, clerical and other assistance as may be required in carrying out the provisions of the Plan. The Trustee may also appoint custodians, subcustodians or subtrustees as to part or all of the Trust Fund.
 
53

 

 

 
Section 11.05         Instructions
 
(a)           Reliance on Instructions. Whenever the Trustee is permitted or required to act upon the directions or instructions of the Investment Fiduciary, Plan Administrator or Company, the Trustee shall be entitled to act in good faith upon any written communication signed by any person or agent designated to act as or on behalf of the Investment Fiduciary, Plan Administrator or Company. Such person or agent shall be so designated either under the provisions of the Plan or in writing by the Company and their authority shall continue until revoked in writing. The Trustee shall incur no liability for failure to act in good faith on such person’s or agent’s instructions or orders without written communication, and the Trustee shall be fully protected in all actions taken in good faith in reliance upon any instructions, directions, certifications and communications believed to be genuine and to have been signed or communicated by the proper person.
 
(b)           Designation of Agent.
 
(1)           Company. The Company shall notify the Trustee in writing as to the appointment, removal or resignation of any person designated to act as or on behalf of the Investment Fiduciary, Plan Administrator or Company. After such notification, the Trustee shall be fully protected in acting in good faith upon the directions of, or dealing with, any person designated to act as or on behalf of the Investment Fiduciary, Plan Administrator or Company until it receives notice to the contrary. The Trustee shall have no duty to inquire into the qualifications of any person designated to act as or on behalf of the Investment Fiduciary, Plan Administrator or Company.
 
(2)           Trustee. If there is more than one Trustee, the Trustees may designate one or more of the Trustees to act on behalf of the Trustees. Such designated Trustee shall be authorized to take any and all actions and execute and deliver such documents as may be necessary or appropriate.
 
(c)           Procedures. The Trustee may adopt such rules and procedures as it deems necessary, desirable, or appropriate including, but not limited to: (i) taking action with or without formal meetings; and (ii) in the event that there is more than one Trustee, a procedure specifying whether action may be taken by a less than unanimous vote.
 
(d)           Payment of Benefits. The Trustee shall pay benefits and expenses from the Trust Fund only upon the written direction of the Plan Administrator. The Trustee shall be fully entitled to rely in good faith on such directions furnished by the Plan Administrator, and shall be under no duty to ascertain whether the directions are in accordance with the provisions of the Plan.
 
54

 

 

 
Section 11.06         Investment of the Fund
 
(a)           Investment Funds. The Investment Fiduciary shall have the exclusive authority and discretion to select the Investment Funds available for investment under the Plan. In making such selection, the Investment Fiduciary shall use the care, skill, prudence and diligence under the circumstances then prevailing that a prudent person acting in a like capacity and familiar with such matters would use in the conduct of an enterprise of a like character and with like aims. The available investments under the Plan shall be sufficiently diversified so as to minimize the risk of large losses, unless under the circumstances it is clearly prudent not to do so. The Investment Fiduciary shall notify the Trustee in writing of the selection of the Investment Funds currently available for investment under the Plan, and any changes thereto.
 
(b)           Investment Managers.
 
(1)           Appointment of Investment Managers. The Investment Fiduciary may appoint one or more Investment Managers with respect to some or all of the assets of the Trust Fund as contemplated by section 402(c)(3) of ERISA. Any such Investment Manager shall acknowledge to the Investment Fiduciary in writing that it accepts such appointment and that it is an ERISA fiduciary with respect to the Plan and the Trust Fund. The Investment Fiduciary shall provide the Trustee with a copy of the written agreement (and any amendments thereto) between the Investment Fiduciary and the Investment Manager. By notifying the Trustee of the appointment of an Investment Manager, the Investment Fiduciary shall be deemed to certify that such Investment Manager meets the requirements of section 3(38) of ERISA. The authority of the Investment Manager shall continue until the Investment Fiduciary rescinds the appointment or the Investment Manager has resigned.
 
(2)           Separation of Duties. The assets with respect to which a particular Investment Manager has been appointed shall be specified by the Investment Fiduciary and shall be segregated in a separate account for the Investment Manager (the “Separate Account”) and the Investment Manager shall have the power to direct the Trustee in every aspect of the investment of the assets of the Separate Account. The Trustee shall not be liable for the acts or omissions of an Investment Manager and shall have no liability or responsibility for acting pursuant to the direction of, or failing to act in the absence of, any direction from an Investment Manager, unless the Trustee knows that by such action or failure to act it would be itself committing a breach of fiduciary duty or participating in a breach of fiduciary duty by such Investment Manager, it being the intention of the parties that each party shall have the full protection of section 405(d) of ERISA.
 
(c)           Proxies.
 
(1)           Delivery of Information. The Trustee shall deliver, or cause to be delivered, to the Company or Plan Administrator all notices, prospectuses, financial statements, proxies and proxy soliciting materials received by the Trustee relating to securities held by the Trust or, if applicable, deliver these materials to the appropriate Participant or the Beneficiary of a deceased Participant.
 
55

 

 

 
(2)           Voting. The Trustee shall not vote any securities held by the Trust except in accordance with the written instructions of the Company, the Investment Fiduciary, or if otherwise permitted in the Plan, the Participant or the Beneficiary of the Participant, if the Participant is deceased. However, the Trustee may, in the absence of instructions, vote “present” for the sole purpose of allowing such shares to be counted for establishment of a quorum at a shareholders’ meeting. The Trustee shall have no duty to solicit instructions from Participants, Beneficiaries, the Investment Fiduciary or the Company.
 
(3)           Investment Manager. To the extent not delegated to Participants pursuant to Subsection (b), the Investment Manager shall be responsible for making any proxy voting or tender offer decisions with respect to securities held in the Separate Account and the Investment Manager shall maintain a record of the reasons for the manner in which it voted proxies or responded to tender offers.
 
Section 11.07       Compensation and Indemnification
 
(a)           Compensation. The Trustee shall be entitled to reasonable compensation for its services as is mutually agreed upon with the Company; provided that such compensation does not result in a prohibited transaction within the meaning of the Code and ERISA. If approved by the Plan Administrator, the Trustee shall also be entitled to reimbursement for all direct expenses properly and actually incurred on behalf of the Plan. Such compensation or reimbursement shall be paid to the Trustee out of the Trust Fund unless paid directly by the Company.
 
(b)           Indemnification. The Company shall indemnify and hold harmless the Trustee (and its delegates) from all claims, liabilities, losses, damages and expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses, incurred by the Trustee in connection with its duties hereunder to the extent not covered by insurance, except when the same is due to the Trustee’s own negligence, willful misconduct, lack of good faith, or breach of its fiduciary duties under the Plan or ERISA.
 
Section 11.08         Resignation and Removal
 
(a)           Resignation. The Trustee may resign at any time by written notice to the Plan Administrator which shall be effective 60 days after delivery unless prior thereto a successor Trustee assumes the responsibilities of Trustee hereunder.
 
(b)           Removal. The Trustee may be removed by the Company at any time.
 
(c)           Successor Trustee. The appointment of a successor Trustee hereunder shall be accomplished by and shall take effect upon the delivery to the resigning or removed Trustee, as the case may be, of written notice of the Company appointing such successor Trustee, and an acceptance in writing of the office of successor Trustee hereunder executed by the successor so appointed. Any successor Trustee may be either a corporation authorized and empowered to exercise trust powers or one or more individuals. All of the provisions set forth herein with respect to the Trustee shall relate to each successor Trustee so appointed with the same force and effect as if such successor Trustee had been originally named herein as the Trustee hereunder. If within 45 days after notice of resignation shall have been given under the provisions of this Article a successor Trustee shall not have been appointed, the resigning Trustee or the Plan Sponsor may apply to any court of competent jurisdiction for the appointment of a successor Trustee.
 
56

 

 

 
(d)           Transfer of Trust Fund. Upon the appointment of a successor Trustee, the resigning or removed Trustee shall transfer and deliver the Trust Fund to such successor Trustee, after reserving such reasonable amount as it shall deem necessary to provide for its expenses in the settlement of its account, the amount of any compensation due to it and any sums chargeable against the Trust Fund for which it may be liable. If the sums so reserved are not sufficient for such purposes, the resigning or removed Trustee shall be entitled to reimbursement for any deficiency from the Plan Sponsor.
 
Section 11.09         Transactional Trustee
 
A Transactional Trustee may be appointed by the Company under this Trust to complete its duties as described in this Section 11.09. In discharging its obligations under this Section 11.09, the Transactional Trustee shall act in best interests of Participants and Beneficiaries in accordance with the requirements of Section 11.01 of the Plan.
 
Any provision of the Plan and Trust in conflict with this Section 11.09 shall be subject to this Section 11.09, except for any provision which would otherwise cause the Plan or Trust to cease to be considered an employee stock ownership plan within the meaning of Code section 4975(e)(7).
 
The Transactional Trustee shall have full power and authority to act on behalf of the Plan solely for purposes of and in connection with the purchase or sale of Company Stock by the Plan from or to a third party. Upon the closing of a transaction involving the purchase or sale of Company Stock by the Plan and the completion of all activities and responsibilities related thereto, including activities and responsibilities performed after the closing of the transaction, the duties of the Transactional Trustee shall cease and the authority and responsibilities of the Transactional Trustee hereunder shall terminate without further notice to the Transactional Trustee or action by the Company.
 
The Transactional Trustee shall have all power and authority necessary or desirable to complete said purchase or sale of Company Stock and shall exercise all fiduciary duties on behalf of the Trust in connection with said purchase or sale (and shall not be required to purchase or sell any Company Stock merely by virtue of this appointment). The terms and conditions attendant to such purchase or sale shall be solely within the discretion of the Transactional Trustee. The Trustee serving pursuant to the original terms of the Trust, if other than the Transactional Trustee, shall have no power, authority or responsibility with respect to said purchase or sale and shall have no duty or responsibility to advise or consult with the Transactional Trustee and further shall have no obligation to review any decision made by the Transactional Trustee with regard to or in connection with the purchase or sale of Company Stock by the Trust.
 
57

 

 

 
ARTICLE 12
SPECIAL TOP-HEAVY RULES
 
Section 12.01         Top-Heavy Status
 
The special provisions set forth in this Article 12 shall apply during any Plan Year in which this Plan, together with any other retirement plans required to be aggregated under Code section 416(g) and the Treasury Regulations promulgated thereunder, is “Top-Heavy.” This Plan is Top-Heavy for any Plan Year:
 
(a)           If the Top-Heavy Ratio for this Plan exceeds 60% and this Plan is not part of any Required Aggregation Group or Permissive Aggregation Group of plans;
 
(b)           If this Plan is a part of a Required Aggregation Group of plans but not part of a Permissive Aggregation Group and the Top-Heavy Ratio for the Required Aggregation Group of plans exceeds 60%; or
 
(c)           If this Plan is a part of a Required Aggregation Group and part of a Permissive Aggregation Group of plans and the Top-Heavy Ratio for the Permissive Aggregation Group exceeds 60%.
 
Section 12.02         Minimum Allocations
 
(a)           In General. In any Plan Year in which the Plan is Top-Heavy, the Company contributions and forfeitures allocated on behalf of any Participant who is (i) employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan Year and (ii) not a Key Employee shall not be less than the lesser of three percent (3%) of such Participant’s Testing Compensation or in the case where the Employer has no defined benefit plan which designates this Plan to satisfy Code section 416, the largest percentage of Company contributions (including Elective Deferrals) and forfeitures, as a percentage of Key Employee’s Testing Compensation, as limited by Code section 401(a)(17), allocated on behalf of any Key Employee for that Plan Year. The minimum allocation is determined without regard to any Social Security contribution. This minimum allocation shall be made even though, under other Plan provisions, the Participant would not otherwise be entitled to receive an allocation, or would have received a lesser allocation for the Plan Year because of (i) the Participant’s failure to complete 1,000 Hours of Service (or any equivalent provided in the Plan), (ii) the Participant’s failure to make mandatory employee contributions to the Plan, or (iii) compensation less than a stated amount. Except as provided in Paragraph (b) below, neither elective deferrals nor matching contributions may be taken into account for the purpose of satisfying the minimum top-heavy contribution requirement.
 
(b)           Matching Contributions. Employer matching contributions made to another plan sponsored by the Employer may be taken into account for purposes of satisfying the minimum contribution requirements of Code section 416(c)(2) and the Plan. Employer matching contributions that are used to satisfy the minimum contribution requirements shall be treated as matching contributions for purposes of the actual contribution percentage test and other requirements of Code section 401(m).
 
58

 

 

 
(c)           Contributions Under Other Plans. The minimum allocation requirement discussed in Subsection 12.02(a) may be met solely or partially in another plan. If the minimum allocation requirement of this Section 12.02 for any Plan Year is met partially in another plan, this Plan may offset the minimum required allocation in Subsection 12.02(a) by the amount allocated in or the benefit accrued in the other plan.
 
Section 12.03         Minimum Vesting
 
(a)           For any Plan Year in which this Plan is Top-Heavy, the following vesting schedule shall automatically apply to the Plan to the extent that it is more favorable than the vesting schedule provided for in Article 7:
 
   
Vesting
Years of Vesting Service
 
Percentage
Less than Two Years
    0 %
Two Years but less than Three Years
    20 %
Three Years but less than Four Years
    40 %
Four Years but less than Five Years
    60 %
Five Years but less than Six Years
    80 %
Six or More Years
    100 %

(b)           The minimum vesting schedule applies to all benefits within the meaning of Code section 411(a)(7) except those attributable to employee contributions or those already subject to a vesting schedule which vests at least as rapidly as the schedule listed above, including benefits accrued before the effective date of Code section 416 and benefits accrued before the Plan became Top-Heavy. Further, no decrease in a Participant’s nonforfeitable percentage may occur in the event the Plan’s status as Top-Heavy changes for any Plan Year. However, this Section does not apply to the account balances of any Employee who does not have an hour of service after the Plan initially became Top-Heavy and such Employee’s Account balance attributable to Company contributions and forfeitures will be determined without regard to this Section. The minimum allocation required (to the extent required to be nonforfeitable under Code section 416(b)) may not be forfeited under Code sections 411(a)(3)(B) or 411(a)(3)(D).
 
ARTICLE 13
PLAN ADMINISTRATION
 
Section 13.01         Plan Administrator
 
(a)           Designation. The Plan Administrator shall be the Plan Sponsor. The Plan Sponsor may subsequently designate other persons to serve as Plan Administrator. If a Committee is designated as the Plan Administrator, the Committee shall consist of one or more individuals who may be Employees appointed by the Plan Sponsor and the Committee shall elect a chairman and may adopt such rules and procedures as it deems desirable. The Committee may also take action with or without formal meetings and may authorize one or more individuals, who may or may not be members of the Committee, to execute documents in its behalf.
 
59

 

 

 
(b)           Authority and Responsibility of the Plan Administrator. The Plan Administrator shall be the Plan “administrator” as such term is defined in section 3(16) of ERISA, and as such shall have total and complete discretionary power and authority:
 
(1)           to make factual determinations, to construe and interpret the provisions of the Plan, to correct defects and resolve ambiguities and inconsistencies therein and to supply omissions thereto. Any construction, interpretation or application of the Plan by the Plan Administrator shall be final, conclusive and binding;
 
(2)           to determine the amount, form or timing of benefits payable hereunder and the recipient thereof and to resolve any claim for benefits in accordance with this Article 13;
 
(3)           to determine the amount and manner of any allocations and/or benefit accruals hereunder;
 
(4)           to maintain and preserve records relating to Participants, former Participants, and their Beneficiaries and Alternate Payees;
 
(5)           to prepare and furnish to Participants, Beneficiaries and Alternate Payees all information and notices required under applicable law or the provisions of this Plan;
 
(6)           to prepare and file or publish with the Secretary of Labor, the Secretary of the Treasury, their delegates and all other appropriate government officials all reports and other information required under law to be so filed or published;
 
(7)           to provide directions to the Trustee with respect to methods of benefit payment, valuations at dates other than regular Valuation Dates and on all other matters where called for in the Plan or requested by the Trustee;
 
(8)           to hire such professional assistants and consultants as it, in its sole discretion, deems necessary or advisable; and shall be entitled, to the extent permitted by law, to rely conclusively on all tables, valuations, certificates, opinions and reports which are furnished by same
 
(9)           to determine all questions of the eligibility of Employees and of the status of rights of Participants, Beneficiaries and Alternate Payees;
 
(10)         to arrange for bonding, if required by law;
 
(11)         to adjust Accounts in order to correct errors or omissions;
 
(12)         to determine whether any domestic relations order constitutes a Qualified Domestic Relations Order and to take such action as the Plan Administrator deems appropriate in light of such domestic relations order;
 
(13)         to retain records on elections and waivers by Participants, their spouses and their Beneficiaries and Alternate Payees;
 
60

 

 

 
(14)         to supply such information to any person as may be required;
 
(15)         to establish, revise from time to time, and communicate to the Trustee and/or the Investment Fiduciary and Investment Manager(s), a funding policy and method for the Plan; and
 
(16)         to perform such other functions and duties as are set forth in the Plan that are not specifically given to the Investment Fiduciary or Trustee.
 
(c)           Procedures. The Plan Administrator may adopt such rules and procedures as it deems necessary, desirable, or appropriate for the administration of the Plan. When making a determination or calculation, the Plan Administrator shall be entitled to rely upon information furnished to it. The Plan Administrator’s decisions shall be binding and conclusive as to all parties.
 
(d)           Allocation of Duties and Responsibilities. The Plan Administrator may designate other persons to carry out any of his duties and responsibilities under the Plan.
 
Section 13.02         Investment Fiduciary
 
(a)           Designation. The Plan Investment Fiduciary shall be designated by the Plan Sponsor. In the absence of a designation, the Plan Administrator shall be the Investment Fiduciary. The Investment Fiduciary may consist of a committee consisting of one or more individuals who may be Employees appointed by the Plan Sponsor. If a committee is appointed, the committee shall elect a chairman and may adopt such rules and procedures as it deems desirable. The committee may take action with or without formal meetings and may authorize one or more individuals, who may or may not be members of the committee, to execute documents in its behalf.
 
(b)           Authority and Responsibility of the Investment Fiduciary. The Investment Fiduciary shall have the following discretionary authority and responsibility:
 
(1)           to manage the investment of the Trust Fund;
 
(2)           to appoint one or more Investment Managers;
 
(3)           to hire such professional assistants and consultants as it, in its sole discretion, deems necessary or advisable;
 
(4)            to establish, revise from time to time, and communicate to the Trustee and/or Investment Manager(s), an investment policy for the Plan; and
 
(5)            to supply such information to any person as may be required.
 
(c)           Procedures. The Investment Fiduciary may adopt such rules and procedures as it deems necessary, desirable, or appropriate in furtherance of its duties hereunder. When making a determination or calculation, the Investment Fiduciary shall be entitled to rely upon information furnished to it. The Investment Fiduciary’s decisions shall be binding and conclusive as to all parties.
 
61

 

 

 
Section 13.03         Compensation of Plan Administrator and Investment Fiduciary
 
The Plan Administrator and Investment Fiduciary shall serve without compensation for their services to the extent that such compensation would constitute a prohibited transaction within the meaning of the Code and ERISA.
 
Section 13.04         Plan Expenses
 
All direct expenses of the Plan, Trustee, Plan Administrator and Investment Fiduciary or any other person in furtherance of their duties hereunder shall be paid or reimbursed by the Company, and if not so paid or reimbursed, shall be proper charges to the Trust Fund and shall be paid therefrom.
 
Section 13.05         Allocation of Fiduciary Responsibility
 
A Plan fiduciary shall have only those specific powers, duties, responsibilities and obligations as are explicitly given him under the Plan and Trust Agreement. It is intended that each fiduciary shall not be responsible for any act or failure to act of another fiduciary. A fiduciary may serve in more than one fiduciary capacity with respect to the Plan.
 
Section 13.06         Indemnification
 
The Company shall indemnify and hold harmless any person serving as the Investment Fiduciary and/or Plan Administrator (and their delegates) from all claims, liabilities, losses, damages and expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses, incurred by such persons in connection with their duties hereunder to the extent not covered by insurance, except when the same is due to such person’s own negligence, willful misconduct, lack of good faith, or breach of its fiduciary duties under this Plan or ERISA.
 
Section 13.07         Claims Procedures
 
(a)           Application for Benefits. A Participant or any other person entitled to benefits from the Plan (a “Claimant”) may apply for such benefits by completing and filing a claim with the Plan Administrator. Any such claim shall be in writing and shall include all information and evidence that the Plan Administrator deems necessary to properly evaluate the merit of and to make any necessary determinations on a claim for benefits. The Plan Administrator may request any additional information necessary to evaluate the claim.
 
(b)           Timing of Notice of Denied Claim. The Plan Administrator shall notify the Claimant of any adverse benefit determination within a reasonable period of time, but not later than 90 days (45 days if the claim relates to a disability determination) after receipt of the claim. This period may be extended one time by the Plan for up to 90 days (30 additional days if the claim relates to a disability determination), provided that the Plan Administrator both determines that such an extension is necessary due to matters beyond the control of the Plan and notifies the Claimant, prior to the expiration of the initial review period, of the circumstances requiring the extension of time and the date by which the Plan expects to render a decision. If the claim relates to a disability determination, the period for making the determination may be extended for up to an additional 30 days if the Plan Administrator notifies the Claimant prior to the expiration of the first 30-day extension period.
 
62

 

 

 
(c)           Content of Notice of Denied Claim. If a claim is wholly or partially denied, the Plan Administrator shall provide the Claimant with a written notice identifying (1) the reason or reasons for such denial, (2) the pertinent Plan provisions on which the denial is based, (3) any material or information needed to grant the claim and an explanation of why the additional information is necessary, and (4) an explanation of the steps that the Claimant must take if he wishes to appeal the denial including a statement that the Claimant may bring a civil action under ERISA.
 
(d)           Appeals of Denied Claim. If a Claimant wishes to appeal the denial of a claim, he shall file a written appeal with the Plan Administrator on or before the 60th day (180th day if the claim relates to a disability determination) after he receives the Plan Administrator’s written notice that the claim has been wholly or partially denied. The written appeal shall identify both the grounds and specific Plan provisions upon which the appeal is based. The Claimant shall be provided, upon request and free of charge, documents and other information relevant to his claim. A written appeal may also include any comments, statements or documents that the Claimant may desire to provide. The Plan Administrator shall consider the merits of the Claimant’s written presentations, the merits of any facts or evidence in support of the denial of benefits, and such other facts and circumstances as the Plan Administrator may deem relevant. The Claimant shall lose the right to appeal if the appeal is not timely made. The Plan Administrator shall ordinarily rule on an appeal within 60 days (45 days if the claim relates to a disability determination). However, if special circumstances require an extension and the Plan Administrator furnishes the Claimant with a written extension notice during the initial period, the Plan Administrator may take up to 120 days (90 days if the claim relates to a disability determination) to rule on an appeal.
 
(e)           Denial of Appeal. If an appeal is wholly or partially denied, the Plan Administrator shall provide the Claimant with a notice identifying (1) the reason or reasons for such denial, (2) the pertinent Plan provisions on which the denial is based, (3) a statement that the Claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records, and other information relevant to the Claimant’s claim for benefits, and (4) a statement describing the Claimant’s right to bring an action under section 502(a) of ERISA. The determination rendered by the Plan Administrator shall be binding upon all parties.
 
(f)           Determinations of Disability. If the claim relates to a disability determination, determinations of the Plan Administrator shall include the information required under applicable United States Department of Labor regulations.
 
Section 13.08         Written Communication
 
To the extent permitted by applicable Treasury and/or Department of Labor Regulations and accepted by the Plan Administrator, all provisions of the Plan and Trust that require written notices and elections shall be interpreted to mean authorized electronic and telephonic notices and elections. Any notice made under the terms of the Plan may be made in any electronic or telephonic method.
 
63

 

 

 
ARTICLE 14
AMENDMENT, MERGER AND TERMINATION
 
Section 14.01         Amendment
 
The provisions of the Plan may be amended in writing at any time and from time to time by the Plan Sponsor, provided, however, that:
 
(a)           No amendment to the Plan shall be effective to the extent that it has the effect of decreasing a Participant’s accrued benefit and no amendment shall increase the duties and liabilities of the Trustee without the Trustee’s consent. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, a Participant’s Account balance may be reduced to the extent permitted under Code section 412(d)(2). For purposes of this Subsection, a Plan amendment which has the effect of decreasing a Participant’s Account balance, with respect to benefits attributable to service before the amendment, shall be treated as reducing an accrued benefit.
 
No amendment to the Plan shall be effective to eliminate or restrict an optional form of benefit. The preceding sentence shall not apply to a plan amendment that eliminates or restricts the ability of a Participant to receive payment of his or her Account balance under a particular optional form of benefit if the amendment is permitted under applicable Treasury Regulations.
 
A Plan amendment may also provide exceptions from the general prohibition against the elimination or restriction of optional forms of benefit for in-kind distributions and elective transfers as specified under Treas. Reg. section 1.411(d)-4 Q&A 2 and 3.
 
(b)           If the Plan’s vesting schedule is amended, in the case of an Employee who is a Participant as of the later of the date the amendment is adopted or the date it becomes effective, the nonforfeitable percentage (determined as of such date) of such Employee’s employer-derived accrued benefit will not be less than the percentage computed under the Plan without regard to such amendment.
 
(c)           If the Plan’s vesting schedule is amended, or the Plan is amended in any way that directly or indirectly affects the computation of the Participant’s nonforfeitable percentage or if the Plan is deemed amended by an automatic change to or from a top-heavy vesting schedule, each Participant with at least 3 years of vesting service with the Employer may elect, within a reasonable period after the adoption of the amendment or change, to have the nonforfeitable percentage computed under the Plan without regard to such amendment or change. The period during which the election may be made shall commence with the date the amendment is adopted or deemed to be made and shall end on the latest of:
 
(1)           60 days after the amendment is adopted;
 
(2)           60 days after the amendment becomes effective; or
 
64

 

 

 
(3)           60 days after the Participant is issued written notice of the amendment by the Plan Administrator.
 
The election provided for in this Section 14.01 shall be made in writing and shall be irrevocable when made.
 
(d)           A Plan amendment may not decrease a Participant’s accrued benefits, or otherwise place greater restrictions or conditions on a Participant’s rights to Code section 411(d)(6) protected benefits, even if the amendment merely adds a restriction or condition that is permitted under the vesting rules in Code section 411(a)(3) through (11). However, an amendment does not violate Code section 411(d)(6) to the extent: (i) it applies with respect to benefits that accrue after the applicable amendment date; or (ii) the plan amendment changes the Plan’s vesting computation period and it satisfies the applicable requirements under 29 CFR 2530.203-2(c).
 
(e)           Code section 411(d)(6) protected benefits will be available without regard to employer discretion in accordance with Treas. Reg. section 1.411(d)(4), Q&A 8 & 9.
 
Section 14.02         Merger and Transfer
 
(a)           Merger. In the event of any merger or consolidation with, or transfer of assets or liabilities to, any other plan, each Participant shall have a benefit in the surviving or transferee plan (as if such plan were then terminated immediately after such merger, consolidation or transfer) that is equal to or greater than the benefit he would have had immediately before such merger, consolidation or transfer in the plan in which he was then a Participant had such plan been terminated at that time.
 
(b)           Transfer.  The Plan Administrator may direct the Trustee to accept assets and related liabilities from another qualified plan provided that it receives sufficient evidence that the transferor plan is a tax-qualified plan.  The Plan Administrator may direct the Trustee to transfer assets and related liabilities to another qualified plan provided that it receives sufficient evidence that the transferee plan is a tax-qualified plan.
 
(c)           Transfer to Non Qualified Trust. Subject to the conditions and limitations of Revenue Ruling 2008-40, a transfer of assets from the Plan’s trust to a nonqualified foreign trust shall be treated as a distribution.
 
(d)           Transfer of Sponsorship. Sponsorship of the Plan may not be transferred to an unrelated taxpayer if such transfer would violate Revenue Ruling 2008-45.
 
Section 14.03         Termination
 
(a)           It is the intention of the Plan Sponsor that this Plan will be permanent. However, the Plan Sponsor reserves the right to terminate the Plan at any time for any reason.
 
(b)           Each entity constituting the Company reserves the right to terminate its participation in this Plan. Each such entity constituting the Company shall be deemed to terminate its participation in the Plan if: (i) it is a party to a merger in which it is not the surviving entity and the surviving entity is not an affiliate of another entity constituting the Company; or (ii) it sells all or substantially all of its assets to an entity that is not an affiliate of another entity constituting the Company.
 
65

 

 

 
(c)           Any termination of the Plan shall become effective as of the date designated by the Plan Sponsor. Except as expressly provided elsewhere in the Plan, prior to the satisfaction of all liabilities with respect to the benefits provided under this Plan, no termination shall cause any part of the funds or assets held to provide benefits under the Plan to be used other than for the benefit of Participants or to meet the administrative expenses of the Plan. In the event of the termination or partial termination of the Plan the Account balance of each affected Participant will be nonforfeitable.  In determining whether a partial plan termination has occurred, the Plan Administrator shall employ the analysis set forth in IRS Revenue Ruling 2007-43. In the event of a complete discontinuance of contributions under the Plan, the Account balance of each affected Participant will be nonforfeitable. Upon termination of the Plan, Participant Accounts shall be distributed in a single lump sum payment unless otherwise required pursuant to Article 8.
 
ARTICLE 15
MISCELLANEOUS
 
Section 15.01         Nonalienation of Benefits
 
(a)           Except as provided in Section 15.01(b), the Trust Fund shall not be subject to any form of attachment, garnishment, sequestration or other actions of collection afforded creditors of the Company, Participants or Beneficiaries under the Plan and all payments, benefits and rights shall be free from attachment, garnishment, trustee’s process, or any other legal or equitable process available to any creditor of such Company, Participant or Beneficiary. Except as provided in Section 15.01(b), no Participant or Beneficiary shall have the right to alienate, anticipate, commute, pledge, encumber or assign any of the benefits or payments which he may expect to receive, contingently or otherwise, under the Plan, except the right to designate a Beneficiary. Any reference to a Participant or Beneficiary shall include an Alternate Payee or the Beneficiary of an Alternate Payee.
 
(b)           Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Trustee and/or Plan Administrator may:
 
(1)           Subject to Section 15.02 below, comply with the provisions and conditions of any Qualified Domestic Relations Order pursuant to the provisions of Code section 414(p).
 
(2)           Comply with any federal tax levy made pursuant to Code section 6331.
 
(3)           Subject to the provisions of Code section 401(a)(13), comply with the provisions and conditions of a judgment, order, decree or settlement agreement issued on or after August 5, 1997 between the Participant and the Secretary of Labor or the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation relating to a violation (or alleged violation) of part 4 of subtitle B of title I of ERISA.
 
(4)           Bring action to recover benefit overpayments.
 
66

 

 

 
Section 15.02         Rights of Alternate Payees
 
(a)           General. An Alternate Payee shall have no rights to a Participant’s benefit and shall have no rights under this Plan other than those rights specifically granted to the Alternate Payee pursuant to a Qualified Domestic Relations Order that are consistent with this Section 15.02.
 
(b)           Distribution. Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, the Plan Administrator may direct the Trustee to distribute all or a portion of a Participant’s benefits under the Plan to an Alternate Payee in accordance with the terms and conditions of a Qualified Domestic Relations Order. The Plan hereby specifically permits and authorizes distribution of a Participant’s benefits under the Plan to an Alternate Payee in accordance with a Qualified Domestic Relations Order prior to the date the Participant has a Termination of Employment, or prior to the date the Participant attains his earliest retirement age as defined in Code section 414(p).
 
(c)           Investment Funds. If the Qualified Domestic Relations Order does not specify the Participant’s Accounts, or Investment Funds in which such Accounts are invested, from which amounts that are separately accounted for shall be paid to an Alternate Payee, such amounts shall be distributed, or segregated, from the Participant’s Accounts, and the Investment Funds in which such Accounts are invested (excluding any amounts invested as a Participant loan), on a pro rata basis. A Qualified Domestic Relations Order may not provide for the assignment to an Alternate Payee of an amount that exceeds the balance of the Participant’s vested Accounts after deduction of any outstanding loan.
 
(d)           Default Rules. Unless a Qualified Domestic Relations Order provides to the contrary:
 
(1)           Death Benefits. An Alternate Payee shall have the right to designate a Beneficiary who shall receive benefits payable to an Alternate Payee which have not been distributed at the time of the Alternate Payee’s death. If the Alternate Payee does not designate a Beneficiary, or if the Beneficiary predeceases the Alternate Payee, benefits payable to the Alternate Payee which have not been distributed shall be paid to the Alternate Payee’s estate. Any death benefit payable to the Beneficiary of an Alternate Payee shall be paid in a single sum as soon as administratively practicable after the Alternate Payee’s death.
 
(2)           Investment Direction. An Alternate Payee shall have the right to direct the investment of any portion of a Participant’s Accounts payable to the Alternate Payee under such order in the same manner with respect to a Participant, which amounts shall be separately accounted for by the Trustee in the Alternate Payee’s name.
 
(3)           Voting Rights. An Alternate Payee shall have the right to direct the Trustee as to the exercise of voting rights in the same manner as provided with respect to a Participant.
 
(e)           Treatment as Spouse. A former spouse may be treated as the spouse or surviving spouse and a current spouse will not be treated as the spouse or surviving spouse to the extent provided under a Qualified Domestic Relations Order.
 
67

 

 

 
(f)           Plan Procedures. The Plan Administrator shall be responsible for establishing reasonable procedures for determining whether any domestic relations order received with respect to the Plan qualifies as a Qualified Domestic Relations Order, and for administering distributions in accordance with the terms and conditions of such procedures and any Qualified Domestic Relations Order.
 
Section 15.03         No Right To Employment
 
Nothing contained in this Plan shall be construed as a contract of employment between the Employer and the Participant, or as a right of any Employee to continue in the employment of the Employer, or as a limitation of the right of the Employer to discharge any of its Employees, with or without cause.
 
Section 15.04         No Right To Trust Assets
 
No Employee, Participant, former Participant, Beneficiary or Alternate Payee shall have any rights to, or interest in, any assets of the Trust upon Termination of Employment or otherwise, except as specifically provided under the Plan. All payments of benefits under the Plan shall be made solely out of the assets of the Trust.
 
Section 15.05         Governing Law
 
This Plan shall be construed in accordance with and governed by the laws of Minnesota to the extent not preempted by Federal law.
 
Section 15.06         Severability of Provisions
 
If any provision of the Plan shall be held invalid or unenforceable, such invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect any other provisions hereof, and the Plan shall be construed and enforced as if such provisions had not been included.
 
Section 15.07         Headings and Captions
 
The headings and captions herein are provided for reference and convenience only, shall not be considered part of the Plan, and shall not be employed in the construction of the Plan.
 
Section 15.08         Gender and Number
 
Except where otherwise clearly indicated by context, the masculine and the neuter shall include the feminine and the neuter, the singular shall include the plural, and vice-versa.
 
68

 

 


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Communications Systems, Inc. has caused the Communications Systems, Inc. Employee Stock Ownership Plan and Trust, as restated, to be executed by its officer, who has been duly authorized by its Board of Directors, and Curtis A. Sampson, Roger H.D. Lacey and Edwin C. Freeman have executed this Plan and Trust and hereby affirm their appointments as Trustees, as of the Effective Date.

     
  COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC.
     
 
By
 
 
 
Its
 
 
 
Date
 
 
 
TRUSTEES
   
   
 
Curtis A. Sampson
   
   
 
Roger H.D. Lacey
   
   
 
Edwin C. Freeman

 

 

 

Exhibit 21
 
SUBSIDIARIES OF COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC.
 
  Subsidiaries     
Jurisdiction of Incorporation
Suttle, Inc.
 
Minnesota
Suttle Apparatus Corporation
 
Illinois
Suttle Costa Rica, S.A.
 
Costa Rica
Austin Taylor Communications, Ltd.
 
United Kingdom
JDL Technologies, Inc.
 
Minnesota
Transition Networks, Inc.
 
Minnesota
Transition Networks Shanghai
 
China
LANart Corporation
 
Massachusetts
MiLAN Technology Corporation
 
California
Image Systems Corporation
 
Minnesota
Transition Networks Europe
 
United Kingdom
Transition Networks EMEA, Ltd.
 
United Kingdom
 
All these subsidiaries are 100%-owned directly by Communications Systems, Inc.  The financial statements of all these subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements of Communications Systems, Inc.

66

 


Exhibit 23

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

We consent to the incorporation by reference in Registration Statement Nos. 333-98325, 333-120561, 333-161376, and 333-177980 on Form S-8 of our reports dated March 12, 2015, relating to the financial statements and financial statement schedule of Communications Systems, Inc. and subsidiaries (the “Company”), and the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting, appearing in this Annual Report on Form 10-K of the Company for the year ended December 31, 2014.
 
/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP
 
March 12, 2015
 
Minneapolis, Minnesota
 
 
67

 



Exhibit 31.1
 
Certifications

I, Roger H.D. Lacey certify that:

 
1.
I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of Communications Systems, Inc.;

 
2.
Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 
3.
Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 
4.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

 
a.
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 
b.
Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 
c.
Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 
d.
Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 
5.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent function):

 
a.
all significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 
b.
any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.
 
Date: March 12, 2015
 
/s/ Roger H.D. Lacey
 
   
Roger H.D. Lacey
 
    Chief Executive Officer  
 
68

 

Exhibit 31.2
 
Certifications

I, Edwin C. Freeman certify that:
    
 
1.
I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of Communications Systems, Inc;
 
 
2.
Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 
3.
Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 
4.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

 
a.
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 
b.
Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 
c.
Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 
d.
Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and
 
 
5.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent function):

 
a.
all significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 
b.
any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.
 
Date: March 12, 2015
 
/s/ Edwin C. Freeman  
 
   
Edwin C. Freeman
 
   
Chief Financial Officer
 
 
69

 

Exhibit 32

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO SECTION 906 OF THE
SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002
 
Pursuant to 18 U.S.C. § 1350, we the undersigned Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, respectively of Communications Systems, Inc. (the “Company”) hereby certify:
 
(1) That the accompanying Annual Report of the Company on Form 10-K for the period ended December 31, 2014 (the “Report”) fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

(2) The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.
 
  /s/ Roger H.D. Lacey
 
Roger H.D. Lacey
Date:  March 12, 2015
Chief Executive Officer
 
  /s/ Edwin C. Freeman
 
Edwin C. Freeman
Date:  March 12, 2015 
Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
 
70

 

 

Exhibit 99.1

(CSI LOGO)
 
FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE
 
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, INC. SUBSIDIARY, JDL TECHNOLOGIES, AWARDED MAJOR FIVE-YEAR NETWORK SERVICES CONTRACT BY BROWARD COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS
 
Minnetonka, MN – March 9, 2015 – Communications Systems, Inc. (NASDAQ: JCS) (“CSI” or the “Company”) , a global provider of physical connectivity infrastructure and services for deployments of broadband networks, today announced that its wholly-owned subsidiary, JDL Technologies, Inc., has been awarded a new contract by the School Board of Broward County to provide Local Area Network, Wireless Local Area Network and data center upgrades, among other IT services, to the public K-12 schools of Broward County, Florida.  The Company estimates that the contract has the potential to generate approximately $83 million of revenues over the five year life of the contract.
 
The contract was awarded on March 3, 2015, after a competitive bidding process in which JDL Technologies along with other area IT Service Providers responded to a request-for-proposal that involved seven commodity groups.  JDL Technologies submitted a formal response against two of the groups and was selected as the primary vendor for both.  The new contract involves some services previously performed by JDL Technologies under a prior contract with the School Board of Broward County as well as new services.  JDL Technologies already has begun its process under the new contract, which is expected to have a favorable impact on CSI’s consolidated revenues in fiscal 2015.
 
Scott Fluegge, President of JDL Technologies, said, “We are extremely pleased to be partnering with the School Board of Broward County to deliver enhanced technology, modern IT infrastructure and expanded wireless coverage for the benefit of students and staff.  This new agreement demonstrates our expertise in providing value-added IT services for complex, comprehensive projects in the education sector, and builds on our robust and enduring relationship with the School Board.”
 
CSI’s Chief Executive Officer Roger H.D. Lacey added, “We are delighted with the outstanding work of the JDL Technologies team to win this new business with the School Board of Broward County.  We believe that JDL Technologies remains well positioned to capitalize on additional opportunities in the education sector, to grow its successful HIPAA-compliant IT services franchise, and to expand its managed services platform across new verticals.”
 
The School Board of Broward County is the sixth largest public school district in the United States, serving more than 260,000 students and 175,000 adult learners through 238 schools, education centers and technical colleges, as well as 99 charter schools.  JDL Technologies has managed the district’s network operations center, which monitors all network elements and more than 100,000 end point devices throughout the county, for more than fifteen years.  Leveraging this experience, JDL has expanded its footprint across Florida, with projects ranging from hardware and wired and wireless design and installation under the Miami-Dade County Public School District’s “Bringing Wireless to the Classroom” initiative, to wireless infrastructure projects for Monroe County and DeSoto County Public Schools, to virtualization and wireless deployments in private academies and universities.  JDL Technologies is also a leading provider of HIPAA-compliant IT services to the Florida healthcare market, and was recently named to the Elite 150 Managed Service Providers in North America as part of the CRN 2015 MSP500.
 
 
 

 

 
About Communications Systems
 
Communications Systems, Inc. provides physical connectivity infrastructure and services for global deployments of broadband networks. Focusing on innovative, cost-effective solutions, CSI provides customers the ability to deliver, manage, and optimize their broadband network services and architecture. From the integration of fiber optics in any application and environment to efficient home voice and data deployments to optimization of data and application access, CSI provides tools for maximum utilization of the network from the edge to the user.  With partners and customers in over 50 countries, CSI has built a reputation as a reliable global innovator focusing on quality and customer service.
 
Forward- Looking Statements
 
This press release includes certain forward-looking statements within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, including statements regarding future financial performance, future growth and future acquisitions. These statements are based on Communications Systems’ current expectations or beliefs and are subject to uncertainty and changes in circumstances. Actual results may vary materially from those expressed or implied by the statements herein due to changes in economic, business, competitive or regulatory factors, and other risks and uncertainties affecting the operation of Communications Systems’ business. These risks, uncertainties and contingencies are presented from time to time in the Company’s Form 10-K Report and other filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission. The information set forth herein should be read in light of such risks. Further, investors should keep in mind that the Company’s financial results in any particular period may not be indicative of future results. Communications Systems is under no obligation to, and expressly disclaims any obligation to, update or alter its forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events, changes in assumptions or otherwise.
 
Contacts:
   
Communications Systems, Inc.   The Equity Group Inc.
Edwin C. Freeman Devin Sullivan
Chief Financial Officer Senior Vice President
952-996-1674 212-836-9608
efreeman@commsysinc.com dsullivan@equityny.com
   
Roger H. D. Lacey Kalle Ahl
Chief Executive Officer  Senior Associate
952-996-1674
212-836-9614
  kahl@equityny.com